WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may
also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and
equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make
additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE.
CALL 1-800-521-2779 OR VISIT CHRYSLER.RSAHELP.COM (USA)
CALL 1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM (CANADA)
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s Manual for further information.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to restrictions and
conditions of use, that are determined solely by FCA US LLC.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................7
2GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................13
3GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................61
4STARTING AND OPERATING .................................................................................................77
5MULTIMEDIA ...............................................................................................................................126
6SAFETY .........................................................................................................................................143
7IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .....................................................................................................189
8SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................208
9TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................253
10CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................258
11INDEX.............................................................................................................................................263
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY ....................................................................... 8
ROLLOVER WARNING ......................................................... 8
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ........................ 8
SYMBOL GLOSSARY............................................................. 9
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ....................................................................................13
Key Fob........................................................................ 13
SENTRY KEY ........................................................................16
IGNITION SWITCH ...............................................................16
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) —
If Equipped .................................................................. 16
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition
(If Equipped)................................................................ 16
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .......................................18
How To Use Remote Start .......................................... 18
To Exit Remote Start Mode ........................................ 18
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped .................................................................. 19
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped ................................................................. 19
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer
Activation — If Equipped ............................................. 19
Remote Start Cancel Message .................................. 19
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ..................20
To Arm The System .................................................... 20
To Disarm The System ............................................... 20
Rearming Of The System............................................ 20
Security System Manual Override.............................. 20
DOORS ................................................................................20
Manual Door Locks......................................................20
Power Door Locks .......................................................21
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry .......................22
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit .................................23
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped ........................24
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors ....24
STEERING WHEEL...............................................................24
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ..............................24
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped .......................25
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION .....................................25
Introducing Voice Recognition ....................................25
Basic Voice Commands...............................................25
Get Started...................................................................26
Additional Information.................................................26
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED ................26
Programming The Memory Feature............................27
Linking And Unlinking The Key Fob To Memory.........27
Memory Position Recall...............................................27
SEATS ..................................................................................28
Manual Adjustment
(Front Seats) — If Equipped.........................................28
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ...............................29
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped.........30
Heated Seats — If Equipped........................................31
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped...................................32
Head Restraints...........................................................32
MIRRORS ............................................................................34
Inside Rearview Mirror ................................................34
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors...........................................34
Outside Mirrors ...........................................................34
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach
Lighting — If Equipped.................................................35
Power Mirrors...............................................................35
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ....................................35
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
S
................................... 35
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®............ 36
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ....................... 36
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Code Or
Non-Rolling Code Device............................................. 36
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener ......................................................................... 36
Programming HomeLink® To A Miscellaneous
Device .......................................................................... 37
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button........... 37
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .................... 37
Security ........................................................................ 38
Troubleshooting Tips................................................... 38
EXTERIOR LIGHTS .............................................................. 39
Multifunction Lever .................................................... 39
Headlight Switch.......................................................... 39
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If Equipped.......... 40
High/Low Beam Switch............................................... 40
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped .................................................................. 40
Flash-To-Pass............................................................... 40
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ......................... 40
Parking Lights.............................................................. 40
Automatic Headlights With
Wipers — If Equipped .................................................. 41
Headlight Time Delay.................................................. 41
Lights-On Reminder .................................................... 41
Fog Lights — If Equipped............................................. 41
Turn Signals................................................................. 42
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped............................. 42
Battery Saver ............................................................... 42
INTERIOR LIGHTS ............................................................... 42
Interior Courtesy Lights............................................... 42
Illuminated Entry ........................................................ 43
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ...........................43
Windshield Wiper Operation....................................... 44
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped .......................... 44
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ..................................... 45
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped ................... 45
CLIMATE CONTROLS ..........................................................45
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions..................................................................... 45
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped ................................................................. 48
Climate Voice Commands .......................................... 48
Operating Tips ............................................................ 48
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ............................49
Storage ........................................................................ 49
AUX/USB Control ........................................................ 50
Power Outlets .............................................................. 51
Power Inverter — If Equipped .................................... 52
WINDOWS ...........................................................................53
Power Window Controls.............................................. 53
Automatic Window Features ..................................... 53
Reset Auto-Up.............................................................. 53
Window Lockout Switch.............................................. 54
Wind Buffeting ............................................................ 54
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE —
IF EQUIPPED .......................................................................54
Opening And Closing The Sunroof ............................. 55
Opening And Closing The Power Shade .................... 55
Pinch Protect Feature................................................. 56
Venting Sunroof .......................................................... 56
Ignition Off Operation.................................................. 56
Sunroof Maintenance................................................. 56
HOOD ...................................................................................56
Opening The Hood ...................................................... 56
Closing The Hood ........................................................ 57
LIFTGATE..............................................................................57
To Unlock/Open The Liftgate ......................................57
To Lock/Close The Liftgate .........................................58
Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped ............................58
Cargo Area Features ...................................................59
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ..........................60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .....................................................61
Instrument Cluster Descriptions.................................63
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
S
..............................63
Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls....63
Oil Life Reset — If Equipped
S
.................................64
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ...................64
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Items ............67
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped .....67
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ................................ 68
Red Warning Lights .....................................................68
Yellow Warning Lights .................................................70
Yellow Indicator Lights ................................................73
Green Indicator Lights.................................................73
White Indicator Lights..................................................74
Blue Indicator Lights....................................................75
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II .....................75
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ...............................................................75
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ........................................................................75
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE ..................................................... 77
Normal Starting ........................................................... 77
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C) .... 77
Extended Park Starting ............................................... 77
If Engine Fails To Start ............................................... 78
After Starting................................................................ 78
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS........................ 78
PARKING BRAKE................................................................78
Electric Park Brake (EPB) ........................................... 78
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ............................................ 81
Key Ignition Park Interlock.......................................... 81
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) System... 81
9-Speed Automatic Transmission ............................. 81
Gear Ranges................................................................ 82
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION .................................... 85
1-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) — If Equipped....... 85
2-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) — If Equipped....... 85
Shift Positions.............................................................. 86
Shifting Procedures..................................................... 86
Rear Electronic Locker System — If Equipped........... 87
SELEC-TERRAIN.................................................................. 88
Description................................................................... 88
POWER STEERING ............................................................. 88
STOP/START SYSTEM........................................................ 89
Autostop Mode ............................................................ 89
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop.... 89
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode............ 89
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System............ 90
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System............ 90
System Malfunction .................................................... 90
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED .................90
Cruise Control.............................................................. 90
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ................................... 92
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED.....................................................99
ParkSense Sensors................................................... 100
ParkSense Display .................................................... 100
ParkSense Warning Display ..................................... 103
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense.......................... 103
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System............ 103
Cleaning The ParkSense System ............................. 103
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ................... 103
Side Distance Warning System................................ 104
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED.................................................. 106
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active
Park Assist System.................................................... 106
Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation................................................................... 107
Exiting The Parking Space ........................................ 109
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED .......................................... 109
LaneSense Operation............................................... 109
Turning LaneSense On Or Off................................... 110
LaneSense Warning Message.................................. 110
Changing LaneSense Settings ................................. 112
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ........................... 112
REFUELING THE VEHICLE .............................................. 113
VEHICLE LOADING ........................................................... 113
Certification Label..................................................... 113
TRAILER TOWING ............................................................ 114
Common Towing Definitions .................................... 114
Trailer Hitch Classification ....................................... 116
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings) ..................................................................... 116
Trailer And Tongue Weight ...................................... 117
Towing Requirements............................................... 117
Towing Tips ............................................................... 119
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME) .... 120
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle .......... 120
Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Models....................................................................... 121
Recreational Towing — 4x4 Models With 1-Speed
Power Transfer Unit.................................................. 121
Recreational Towing — 4x4 Models With 2-Speed
Power Transfer Unit.................................................. 121
DRIVING TIPS ................................................................... 123
On-Road Driving Tips ................................................ 123
Off-Road Driving Tips................................................ 123
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ..................................................... 126
CYBERSECURITY ............................................................. 126
UCONNECT SETTINGS ..................................................... 126
Customer Programmable Features ......................... 127
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED..................................................................... 140
Radio Operation........................................................ 140
Media Mode .............................................................. 140
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES.................. 140
Regulatory And Safety Information.......................... 140
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED.................................141
Off-Road Pages Status Bar ......................................141
Drivetrain ..................................................................141
Pitch & Roll ...............................................................142
Accessory Gauges ....................................................142
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped .....................................142
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ...........................................................143
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................................143
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...................143
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS.......................................150
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped ............150
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped ...........................................154
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ................155
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................................159
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ...................159
Important Safety Precautions...................................159
Seat Belt Systems ....................................................159
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ..................166
Child Restraints .........................................................176
SAFETY TIPS......................................................................186
Transporting Passengers ..........................................186
Transporting Pets ......................................................186
Connected Vehicles...................................................186
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle .......................................................................187
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ..................................................188
Exhaust Gas...............................................................188
Carbon Monoxide Warnings .....................................188
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ..................................... 189
SOS AND ASSIST MIRROR ............................................. 189
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ..................................... 191
Preparations For Jacking.......................................... 192
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage .......................... 192
Jacking Instructions.................................................. 193
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ................................. 196
Tire Service Kit Storage ............................................ 196
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation........... 196
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions ......................... 197
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit.......................... 198
JUMP STARTING............................................................... 200
Preparations For Jump Start .................................... 200
Jump Starting Procedure.......................................... 201
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED ............... 202
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ....................................... 203
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE .......................................... 203
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ........................................... 204
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...................................... 205
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models............................. 206
4x4 Models With 1–Speed Power Transfer Unit..... 206
4x4 Models With 2–Speed Power Transfer Unit..... 206
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ..................... 206
Recovery Strap — If Equipped .................................. 207
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) .. 207
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ..................................... 207
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ................................................ 208
Maintenance Plan..................................................... 209
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ................................................ 212
2.0L Engine .............................................................. 212
2.4L Engine .............................................................. 213
Checking Oil Level .................................................... 214
Adding Washer Fluid ................................................ 214
Maintenance-Free Battery ...................................... 214
Pressure Washing..................................................... 215
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ................................................. 215
Engine Oil ................................................................. 215
Engine Oil Filter......................................................... 216
Engine Air Cleaner Filter........................................... 216
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection............................... 217
Air Conditioner Maintenance ................................... 217
Body Lubrication....................................................... 219
Windshield Wiper Blades ........................................ 219
Exhaust System ....................................................... 222
Cooling System ......................................................... 222
Brake System ........................................................... 225
Automatic Transmission........................................... 225
Fuses ......................................................................... 226
Bulb Replacement ................................................... 233
TIRES ................................................................................ 235
Tire Safety Information............................................. 235
Tires — General Information..................................... 241
Tire Types .................................................................. 244
Spare Tires — If Equipped ....................................... 244
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .................................... 245
Snow Traction Devices ............................................ 246
Tire Rotation Recommendations............................. 248
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................................................. 249
Treadwear ................................................................. 249
Traction Grades ........................................................ 249
Temperature Grades ................................................ 249
STORING THE VEHICLE ....................................................250
BODYWORK ......................................................................250
Protection From Atmospheric Agents ......................250
Body And Underbody Maintenance..........................250
Preserving The Bodywork .........................................250
INTERIORS ........................................................................251
Seats And Fabric Parts..............................................251
Plastic And Coated Parts ..........................................251
Leather Surfaces.......................................................252
Glass Surfaces ..........................................................252
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) .....................253
BRAKE SYSTEM ................................................................253
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS...............253
Torque Specifications ...............................................253
FUEL REQUIREMENTS......................................................254
2.0L Engine................................................................254
2.4L Engine................................................................254
Reformulated Gasoline.............................................254
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends .....................................254
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles.............255
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ..................255
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
(MMT) In Gasoline .....................................................255
Materials Added To Fuel ...........................................255
Fuel System Cautions ...............................................255
FLUID CAPACITIES............................................................256
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS................................256
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS..............................257
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................. 258
Prepare For The Appointment .................................. 258
Prepare A List ............................................................ 258
Be Reasonable With Requests ................................ 258
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ............................................ 258
Roadside Assistance ................................................ 258
FCA US LLC Customer Center .................................. 259
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .......................... 259
Mexico ....................................................................... 259
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ........................... 260
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY).................................................. 260
Service Contract ....................................................... 260
WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................................260
MOPAR® PARTS ..............................................................260
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ......................................261
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C........261
In Canada...................................................................261
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .......................................261
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS.......................262
GENERAL INFORMATION.................................................262
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Jeep®. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers differently from many
passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on-road use
only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are
familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your
driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics. Always
observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision
Ú page 123.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details of the
terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions,
recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you should
only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner’s Information, which may or
may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible
way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial
reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Jeep® best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your satisfaction.
1
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read the entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information.
Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This
vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger
vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven
in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of
gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can
cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision,
rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or
fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts
could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling
injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
These statements apply to operating procedures that
could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements apply to procedures that could result in
damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation, operation,
and reliability. If not followed, may result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier use of the
product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information on a
particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information pertaining to the
topic.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness
and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be
observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when operating
your vehicle. See below for the definition of each symbol
Ú page 68.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 68
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 68
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 68
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 69
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 69
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 69
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 69
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 69
Hood Open Warning Light
Ú page 69
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Ú page 69
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 69
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 70
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 70
Vehicle Security Warning Light
Ú page 70
Red Warning Lights
1
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
Yellow Warning Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 70
Electric Park Brake Warning Light
Ú page 70
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 70
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
Ú page 71
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
Ú page 71
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 71
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
Ú page 71
Service LaneSense Warning Light
Ú page 71
LaneSense Warning Light
Ú page 71
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator (MIL) Warning Light
Ú page 71
Service 4WD Warning Light
Ú page 72
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
Ú page 72
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
Ú page 72
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
Ú page 72
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Ú page 72
Yellow Warning Lights
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
Yellow Indicator Lights
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off Indicator Light
Ú page 73
4WD Low Indicator Light
Ú page 73
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
Ú page 73
Wait To Start Indicator Light
Ú page 73
Water In Fuel Indicator Light
Ú page 73
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Vehicle Indicator Light
Ú page 73
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without Target Vehicle Indicator Light
Ú page 74
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
Ú page 74
Front Fog Indicator Light
Ú page 74
LaneSense Indicator Light
Ú page 74
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
Ú page 74
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
Ú page 74
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 74
White Indicator Lights
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
Ú page 74
Green Indicator Lights
1
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
13
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle may be equipped with a standard ignition key
fob or a keyless ignition key fob.
The standard ignition key fob operates the ignition switch.
Insert the square end of the key fob into the ignition switch
located on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired
position. The key fob also contains an emergency key,
which is stored in the rear of the key fob.
Key Fob For Standard Ignition
Your vehicle may be equipped with a keyless ignition key
fob that supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE), Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), Remote Start (if
equipped), and power liftgate operation. This type of key
fob operates a START/STOP ignition button system. This
feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with
the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if the key
fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other
electronic device. This may result in poor performance.
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft
(20 m). The key fob does not need to be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
1 — Panic Button
2 — Unlock Button
3 — Lock Button
4 — Remote Start Button
5 — Emergency Key Location
2
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob For Keyless Ignition
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully
depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be verified
by referring to the instrument cluster, which will display
directions to follow.
Improper disposal of key fob batteries may be harmful
to the environment. Please see an authorized dealer
for proper battery disposal
Ú page 262.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push the interior door unlock button on the door panel.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is unlocked using the interior door panel, and
no door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will
relock and if equipped, the security system will arm. You
can change the current setting within the Uconnect
system
Ú page 126.
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver’s door, or twice within five seconds to
unlock all the doors and the liftgate. To lock all the doors
and the liftgate, push the lock button once.
When the doors unlock, the turn signals will flash and
Illuminated Approach will be activated. When the doors
lock, the turn signals will flash and the horn will chirp. This
setting can be adjusted in the Uconnect system
Ú page 126.
Key Left Vehicle Feature
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the vehicle
while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the ON/RUN or
START position, the message “Key Fob Has Left The
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster display
along with an interior chime. An exterior audible and visual
alert will also be activated to warn the driver.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times along with
a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior lights.
NOTE:
The doors have to be open and then closed in order for
the vehicle to detect a key fob; the Key Left Vehicle
feature will not activate until all of the doors are closed.
These alerts will not be activated in situations where
the vehicle’s engine is left running with the key fob
inside.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The replacement battery is one CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery
dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin battery
dimensions.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for
further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1 — Unlock Button
2 — Liftgate Button (If Equipped)
3 — Lock Button
4 — Remote Start Button (If Equipped)
5 — Panic Button
6 — Emergency Key
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the
mechanical latch on the back of the key fob
sideways with your thumb and then pulling the key
out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
Emergency Key Removal
2. Separating key fob halves requires screw removal (if
equipped), and gently prying the two halves of the key
fob apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during
removal.
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace
the battery. When replacing the battery, match the (+)
sign on the battery to the (+) sign on the inside of the
battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching
the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together, reposition and secure the screw.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
repurposed and reprogrammed to another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle elec-
tronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank
key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho-
rized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to match
the vehicle locks.
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell battery.
Do not ingest the battery; there is a chemical burn
hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can
cause severe internal burns in just two hours and
can lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been swallowed or
placed inside any part of the body, seek immediate
medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from children. If
the battery compartment does not close securely,
stop using the product and keep it away from chil-
dren.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Igni-
tion, always remember to place the ignition in the
OFF position when exiting the vehicle.
2
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system
does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is
automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition
and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent
unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs
that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start
and operate the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a
key fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
indicates that someone attempted to start the engine with
an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used
to start the engine but there is an issue with the vehicle
electronics, the engine will start and shut off after two
seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should
this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible
by an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics
Ú page 262.
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key.
IGNITION SWITCH
IGNITION NODE MODULE (IGNM) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Ignition Node Module (IGNM) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent
positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position
is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When
released from the START position, the switch
automatically returns to the ON/RUN position.
Ignition Switch
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
(I
F EQUIPPED)
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several operating
modes that are labeled and will illuminate when in
position. These modes are OFF, ACC, ON/RUN, and START.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket Remote Start systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
(Continued)
Push Button Ignition
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped
Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, alarm, etc.)
are still available
ACC
Engine is not started
Some electrical devices are available (e.g. power
sunroof, power windows, etc.)
ON/RUN
Driving position
All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate
controls, heated seats, etc.)
START
The engine will start (when foot is on the brake)
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change with the push of a
button, the key fob may have a low battery. In this situ-
ation, a backup method can be used to operate the
ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the
emergency key) of the key fob against the START/STOP
ignition button and push to operate the ignition switch.
Starting The Ignition With Depleted Key Fob Battery
NOTE:
For information on normal starting, see Ú page 77.
When opening the driver's door and the ignition is in
the ON/RUN (engine not running) position, a chime will
sound to remind you to place the ignition in the OFF
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — ON/RUN
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete
stop, then shift the automatic transmission into
PARK, apply the parking brake, place the engine in
the OFF position, remove the key fob from the vehicle
and lock your vehicle. If equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™, always make sure the keyless ignition
is in OFF position, remove the key fob from the
vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ in the ON/RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always
remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
WARNING!
2
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
position. In addition to the chime, the message “Igni-
tion or Accessory ON” will display in the cluster.
The power window switches and power sunroof (if
equipped) will remain active for three minutes after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The timing for this
feature is programmable.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range
of approximately 328 ft (100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold weather,
and to reach a comfortable climate in all ambient
conditions before the driver enters the vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may reduce
this range
Ú page 262.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the
parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp (if
programmed within the Uconnect system). Then, the
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the Remote
Start mode for a 15 minute cycle. Pushing the Remote
Start button a third time shuts the engine off.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position
before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated for
a third cycle.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
The parking lights will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
For security, power window and power sunroof opera-
tion (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in
the Remote Start mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position
before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated for
a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Liftgate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
System not disabled from previous Remote Start event
Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
Ignition in OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Vehicle Security system is not signaling an intrusion
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illuminated
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start
system, push and release the START/STOP ignition button
while pressing the brake pedal prior to the end of the
15 minute cycle. If the vehicle is not equipped with a
START/STOP ignition button, insert the key fob into the
ignition switch and place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if the
Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed again, or if
the engine is allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
Once the driver’s door is opened, or the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position, the climate controls will resume
previously set operations (temperature, blower control,
etc.).
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ —
Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start
Active — Push Start Button” will show in the instrument
cluster display until you push the START/STOP ignition
button.
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside ambient
temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the system will
automatically activate front defrost for 15 minutes or less.
The timing is dependent on the ambient temperature.
Once the timer expires, the system will automatically
adjust the settings depending on ambient conditions. See
“Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next
section for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear defrost
will automatically turn on in cold weather. The heated
steering wheel and driver heated seat feature will turn on
if selected in the Comfort menu screen within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 126. In warm weather, the driver vented
seat feature will automatically turn on when the Remote
Start is activated, if programmed in the Comfort menu
screen. The vehicle will adjust the climate control settings
depending on the outside ambient temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped
The climate controls automatically adjust to the optimal
temperature and mode settings dependent on the outside
ambient temperature. This will occur until the driver’s door
is opened, or the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position,
where the climate controls will resume their previous
settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
In ambient temperatures at 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the
climate settings will default to maximum heat, with
fresh air entering the cabin. If the front defrost timer
expires, the vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to 78°F
(26°C), the climate settings will be based on the last
settings selected by the driver.
In ambient temperatures at 78°F (26°C) or above, the
climate settings will default to MAX A/C, Bi-Level Mode,
and Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate control
settings, see
Ú page 45.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of Remote
Start until the driver’s door is opened, or until the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN position. The climate control
settings will change if manually adjusted by the driver
while the vehicle is in Remote Start mode, and exit auto-
matic override. This includes the OFF button on the
climate controls, which will turn the system off.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER
D
E-ICER ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will
resume its previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will continue.
REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE
One of the following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote
start, or exits Remote Start prematurely:
Remote Start Canceled — Door Open
Remote Start Canceled — Hood Open
Remote Start Canceled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Canceled — Liftgate Open
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
Remote Start Canceled — Too Cold
Remote Start Canceled — Time Expired
The message will stay active until the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position.
2
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors,
hood, liftgate, and the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition for
unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security system
is armed, interior switches for door locks and liftgate
release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the
Vehicle Security system will provide the following audible
and visible signals:
The horn will pulse.
The turn signals will flash.
The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will
flash.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry, make
sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
Push the lock button on the interior power door
lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door
open.
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
door handle with a valid key fob available in the
same exterior zone
Ú page 22.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock the door
Ú page 22.
Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to disarm the
system.
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate button on
the key fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security
system.
The Vehicle Security system remains armed during
power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will not
disarm the Vehicle Security system. If someone enters
the vehicle through the opened liftgate, then opens any
door, the alarm will sound.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle
Security system will arm, regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will turn the horn off
after a 29 second cycle (with five seconds between cycles
and up to eight cycles if the trigger remains active) and
then rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door
trim panel until the red area is hidden. To unlock the front
doors, pull the inside door handle to the first detent or
rotate the door lock button until the red indicator is visible.
To unlock the rear doors, rotate the door lock button until
the red indicator is visible.
If the red indicator is hidden when you shut the door, the
door is locked. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
(Continued)
NOTE:
The manual door locks will not lock or unlock the liftgate.
Lock Knob And Door Handle
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power door lock switches are located on each front
door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock the doors.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ system if it is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block
the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ system from starting the vehicle.
Power Door Lock Switches
The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the keys are
detected inside the vehicle when door lock button on the
front door panel is used to lock the door. This will occur for
two attempts. Upon the third attempt, the doors will lock
even if the key fob is inside.
If the door lock switch is pushed while the ignition is in the
ACC or ON/RUN position and the driver's door is open, the
doors will not lock.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside
the vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door may
be unlocked manually by rotating the lock knob.
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and exit the vehicle.
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. If equipped
with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition, always make sure
the keyless ignition is placed in the OFF position, and
remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause severe personal injuries or death.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
2
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE
E
NTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry. This feature allows
you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) and liftgate
without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off within the
Uconnect system Ú page 126.
If wearing gloves, if it has been raining/snowing, or
there is salt/dirt covering the Passive Entry door
handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting
in a slower response time.
The doors may unlock when water is sprayed on the
Passive Entry door handles, if the key fob is located
outside of the vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the handle.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will relock and
if equipped will arm the Vehicle Security system.
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle Passive
Entry system if it is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop or other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob's wireless signal and prevent the
Passive Entry handle from locking/unlocking the
vehicle.
Passive Entry activates illuminated approach for the
time set by the customer within the Uconnect system
(0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds), and flashes the turn signal
lights.
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
door handle, grab the handle to unlock the vehicle.
Grabbing the driver’s door handle will unlock the driver
door automatically. Grabbing the passenger door handle
will unlock all doors and the liftgate automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock when
you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle,
depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect
system
Ú page 126.
All doors will unlock when the front passenger door
handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature
which will function if the ignition is OFF.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search
in any Passive Entry vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key fob
while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
detects a Passive Entry key fob inside the car, the car will
unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid Passive
Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle. The vehicle will
not unlock the doors when any of the following conditions
are true:
The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
If a paired key fob is found outside of the vehicle,
FOBIK-Safe will not activate.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then the doors are closed.
If the liftgate is opened and then all four doors are
locked, the key fob will become locked in the vehicle if
the liftgate is closed and will not alert the owner.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, grab the liftgate release handle to open the
liftgate.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, push the Passive Entry button located to the left of
the liftgate release handle.
NOTE:
The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will lock all doors
and the liftgate.
Liftgate Passive Entry / Release Handle Location
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of either front door handle, push the Passive Entry
lock button located on the outside door handle.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
NOTE:
DO NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle without the vehicle unlocking.
If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect
Settings, the key fob protection described in
"Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)" remains active/functional.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
battery is depleted
Ú page 262.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is
enabled within Uconnect Settings
Ú
page 126.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The gear selector was not in PARK, then is placed in
PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
1 — Passive Entry Button
2 — Liftgate Release Handle
2
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when
the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto
door lock feature is enabled/disabled in the Uconnect
Settings.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
S
YSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat-blade
screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to the
lock or unlock position. When the system on a door is
engaged, that door can only be opened by using the
outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
NOTE:
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door lock
is in the unlocked position.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it
is in the locked position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged, rotate the
door lock button until the lock indicator is hidden
(unlocked position), lower the window, and open the
door with the outside door handle.
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children. After
engaging the child lock on both rear doors, check for
effective engagement by trying to open a door with the
internal handle. Once the Child-Protection Door Lock
system is engaged, it is impossible to open the doors from
inside the vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be
sure to check that there is no one left inside.
STEERING WHEEL
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located
below the steering wheel at the end of the steering
column.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,
move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired.
To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the
steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To
lock the steering column in position, push the control
handle upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from
the outside when the Child-Protection Door Lock system
is engaged (locked).
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
I
F EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on, a sensor will monitor the
temperature of the steering wheel and adjust the power
level to maintain an optimum heat level.
The heated steering wheel control button is located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
button through the climate screen or the controls screen.
Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn
the heating element on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a second time
to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel
to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
Ú page 19.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. This section provides Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your vehicle’s Voice
Recognition (VR) system.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The following basic Voice Commands can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“
Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
“
Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands.
“
Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recognition system’s status.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the heated steering wheel. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the heated steering wheel to overheat.
2
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate your
Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and passenger
conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, first push the VR
button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice
Command.
You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR button and saying a Voice Command
from the current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2022 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. SiriusXM® and all
related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM®
Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or call:
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
Canadian residents visit www.DriveUconnect.ca or call:
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983
(French)
SiriusXM Guardian™ services support:
US residents visit www.driveuconnect.com/
sirius-xm-guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visit https://www.driveucon-
nect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian or call:
1-877-324-9091
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to save up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch.
Each memory profile saves desired position settings for
the following features:
Driver seat
Easy Entry/Exit seat (if equipped)
Side mirrors
A set of desired radio station presets
1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call And Send Or
Receive A Text
2 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin Radio,
Media, And Climate Functions
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each can be
linked to either memory position 1 or 2.
Be sure to program the radio presets prior to program-
ming the memory settings.
The memory settings switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:
The set (S) button, which is used to activate the
memory save function.
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either
of two saved memory profiles.
Driver Memory Switch
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase the selected profile
from memory.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station
presets).
3. Push the set (S) button on the memory switch, and
then push the desired memory button (1 or 2) within
five seconds. The instrument cluster display will show
which memory position is being set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK,
but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE KEY FOB
T
O MEMORY
Your remote keyless entry key fob can be programmed to
recall one of two saved memory profiles.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fob you must select the
“Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” feature through the
Uconnect system
Ú page 126.
To program your key fob, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
2. Select the desired memory profile 1 or 2.
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory
switch, then within five seconds push and release the
button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory Profile Set”
(1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster display.
4. Push and release the lock button on the key fob
within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fob can be unlinked from your memory settings
by pushing the set (S) button, followed by pushing the
unlock button on the key fob within 10 seconds.
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK, a
message will display in the instrument cluster display.
To recall the memory settings for driver one or two, push
the desired memory button number (1 or 2) or the unlock
button on the key fob linked to the desired memory
position.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the memory
buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a recall is
canceled, the driver seat will stop moving. A delay of one
second will occur before another recall can be selected.
2
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system of the
vehicle.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT
(FRONT SEATS) — IF EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with a front passenger
manual adjustment seat. The forward/rearward
adjustment bar is located at the front of the seat, near the
floor. Height and recline levers are located on the
outboard side of the seat.
Manual Seat Adjustments
NOTE:
Do not place objects beneath the adjustable seat or
impede proper seat adjustment.
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
On models equipped with manual seats, the adjustment
bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the
seat adjusters have latched.
Manual Seat Height Adjustment
The seat height can be raised or lowered by using a lever,
located on the outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on
the lever to raise the seat height or push downward on the
lever to lower the seat height.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
1 — Recline Lever
2 — Height Adjustment Lever
3 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Bar
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat
belt.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
Rear Seat Recline Adjustment
The rear seatback also reclines for additional passenger
comfort.
To recline the rear seat, pull on the handle located on the
upper outboard side of the seatback.
Rear Seat Recline Lever
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With
Fold-Flat Feature
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still
maintains some rear seating room.
NOTE:
Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
position the front seat to its mid-track position. Also, be
sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned
forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily.
TO LOWER THE REAR SEAT
1. Lift the seatback release lever located on the upper
outer edge of the seat.
Rear Seat Release Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Fold the rear seatback completely forward.
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from
the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for an
extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
unfolding the seats, over time the seat cushion will return
to its normal shape.
TO RAISE THE REAR SEAT
NOTE:
If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback
from fully locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat
to its proper position.
Raise the seatback and lock it into place.
POWER ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with a power driver's seat
and/or power passenger seat. The power seat switches
are located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor,
and control the movement of the seat cushion and
seatback.
Power Seat Switches
NOTE:
Do not place objects beneath the adjustable seat or
impede proper seat adjustment.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward by
pushing the seat switch in the desired direction. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in two
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or
Rearward
The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward
by using the seatback recline switch. The seatback will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability for
child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
1 — Seat Switch
2 — Seatback Switch
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or
decrease the lumbar support.
Power Lumbar Switch
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you
have the driver seat positioned when you place the
vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF posi-
tion, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches
(60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater
than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set posi-
tion when you place the vehicle’s ignition in the ACC or
RUN position.
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not available when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 inches (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry and Easy
Exit positions are stored in each memory setting profile
Ú page 26.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or disabled through
the programmable features in the Uconnect system
Ú page 126.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are
located within the Uconnect system. You can
gain access to the control buttons through the
climate screen and the controls screen.
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat settings. The
indicator arrows in the touchscreen buttons indicate the
level of heat in use. Two indicator arrows will illuminate for
HI, and one for LO. Turning the heating elements off will
return the user to the radio screen.
Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI setting
on.
Press the heated seat button a second time to turn the
LO setting on.
Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator
changes it.
For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
Ú page 19.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
2
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VENTILATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
Located in the seat cushion and seatback are fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment and move
air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep
the occupant cooler in higher ambient temperatures.
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
The front ventilated seat controls are located
within the climate and control screen in the
Uconnect system. The fans operate at two
speeds: HI and LO.
Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.
Press the ventilated seat button a second time to
choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat button a third time to turn the
ventilated seat off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to
operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
Ú page 19.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the rear of the
head restraint face forward) in an attempt to gain addi-
tional clearance to the back of your head.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear
impact, the RHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupant’s
head and the RHR.
The RHRs will automatically return to their normal position
following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not return to their
normal position, see an authorized dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
NOTE:
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go.
Then, push the release button and the adjustment button
at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint
up. Seatback angle may need to be adjusted to fully
remove the head restraint. To reinstall the head restraint,
put the head restraint posts into the holes and push
downward. Then adjust the head restraint to the appro-
priate height.
Front Head Restraint
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a colli-
sion.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
Rear Head Restraints
The rear outboard head restraints have two positions: up
and down. The center head restraint has three positions:
up, mid, and down. When the center seat is being
occupied the head restraint should be adjusted to the
occupant. When there is no occupant in the center seat,
the head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility
for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
NOTE:
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go.
Then, push the release button and the adjustment
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the
head restraint posts into the holes and push down-
ward. Then, adjust the head restraint to the appro-
priate height.
The seatback may need to be reclined in order to fully
remove the outboard head restraints.
Outboard Head Restraint
Center Head Restraint
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed
head restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
reinstallation instructions prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation
of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a colli-
sion and could result in serious injury or death.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
1 — Adjustment Button
2 — Release Button
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
reinstallation instructions prior to operating the vehicle
or occupying a seat.
2
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Auto Dimming Mirror
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a
twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield.
The mirror installs on the windshield button with a
counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on
the view through the rear window.
Automatic Dimming Button
NOTE:
The automatic dimming feature is disabled when the
vehicle is in REVERSE to improve rear view viewing.
The automatic dimming feature can be turned on or off
through the touchscreen, or using the power button on the
base of the mirror.
Press the mirror dimmer button once to turn the
feature on.
Press the mirror dimmer button a second time to turn
the feature off.
NOTE:
In some cases, there may not be a button. If there is no
power button, the mirror will be in default auto dimming
mode.
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror
cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically. Closing
the mirror cover will turn off the light.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor Slide-On-Rod Feature
The sun visor Slide-On-Rod feature allows for additional
flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
NOTE:
The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much
wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other
object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or
distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
OUTSIDE MIRRORS WITH TURN SIGNAL
A
ND APPROACH LIGHTING —
I
F EQUIPPED
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal and
approach lighting contain LEDs.
The LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash with the
corresponding turn signal lights in the front and rear of the
vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning flashers will also
activate these LEDs.
The LEDs also supplies illuminated entry lighting, which
turns on in both mirrors when you use the key fob or open
any door. This LED shines downward to illuminate the
ground in front of the doors.
The illuminated entry lighting fades to off after about 30
seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the ignition
is placed into the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The approach lighting will not function when the gear
selector is moved out of the PARK position.
POWER MIRRORS
The power mirror control switch is located on the driver's
side door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons
and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror,
push the mirror select button for the mirror that you want
to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, push on any of
the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror
to move.
Power Mirror Switches
Power mirror position can be saved as part of the Driver
Memory Settings (if equipped)
Ú page 26.
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice.
This feature will be activated whenever you
turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped)
Ú page 45.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® Buttons On Sun Visor
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
HomeLink® replaces up to three
hand-held transmitters that operate
devices such as garage door
openers, motorized gates, lighting,
or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your
vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the over-
head console or sunvisor designate the three different
HomeLink® channels.
1 — Left Mirror Selection
2 — Right Mirror Selection
3 — Mirror Direction Control
2
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To operate HomeLink®, push and release any of the
programmed HomeLink® buttons. These buttons will
activate the devices they are programmed to with each
press of the corresponding HomeLink® button.
The HomeLink® indicator light is located above the
center button.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security system
is active
Ú page 262.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate transmission of
the Radio Frequency (RF) signal, it is recommended that a
new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the
device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system. Make sure your hand-held transmitter is
programmed to activate the device you are trying to
program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels of your
HomeLink® before you use it for the first time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
C
HANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons
(I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until the
HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
R
OLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE
D
EVICE
Before programming a device to one of your HomeLink®
buttons, you must determine whether the device has a
rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a good
indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically, devices
manufactured after 1995 have rolling codes. A device with
a rolling code will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button
located where the antenna is attached to the device. The
button may not be immediately visible when looking at the
device. The name and color of the button may vary slightly
by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button you
normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not have a
rolling code. These devices will also not have a “LEARN” or
“TRAIN” button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
G
ARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to activate your
garage door opener motor, proceed as follows:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this
procedure. You do not need to erase all channels when
programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
button you wish to program, while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
program while you push and hold the garage door
opener transmitter button you are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator
light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Once this
happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is plugged in
before moving on to the rolling code/non-rolling code final
steps.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling code final
step 2, after completing rolling code final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener motor. Firmly
push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button three times (holding the button
for two seconds each time). If the garage door opener
motor operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to confirm
that the garage door opener motor operates. If the
garage door opener motor does not operate, repeat
the final steps for the rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the HomeLink® indicator light. If the
HomeLink® indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to confirm
that the garage door opener motor operates. If the
garage door opener motor does not operate, repeat
the steps from the beginning.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a
miscellaneous device follows the same procedure as
programming to a garage door opener
Ú page 36. Be sure
to determine if the device has a rolling code, or non-rolling
code before beginning the programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmitter
signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to
pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner. The procedure may need to
be performed multiple times to successfully pair the
device to your HomeLink® buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
H
OMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has been
previously trained, without erasing all the channels,
proceed as follows. Be sure to determine whether the new
device you want to program the HomeLink® button to has
a rolling code, or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, without
starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the HomeLink® indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3.
Without releasing the button, proceed with Step 2 in
“Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener” and follow all remaining steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmitter
signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close while
you are programming the universal transmitter. Do
not program the transmitter if people or pets are in
the path of the door or gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or
confined area while programming the transmitter.
Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous when inhaled and
can cause you and others to be severely injured or
killed.
2
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™, place
the ignition in the RUN position. Make sure while
programming HomeLink® with the engine on that your
vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the garage door
remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light
in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button
while you push and release (cycle) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device
should activate when the HomeLink® button is
pushed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button (Canadian/
Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink® universal transmitter is disabled when
the Vehicle Security system is active.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®, here
are some of the most common solutions:
Replace the battery in the garage door opener
hand-held transmitter.
Push the LEARN button on the garage door opener to
complete the training for a rolling code.
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transmitter. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open and close while
you are programming the universal transmitter. Do
not program the transmitter if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transmitter with a garage door opener that has a
“stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use
a garage door opener without these safety features.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Multifunction Lever
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, automatic headlights (if
equipped), instrument panel lights, and fog lights (if
equipped).
Headlight Switch
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an OFF
detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the headlight
switch is placed in the parking lights position. However,
the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be activated along
with the front and rear marker lights. The DRLs may be
deactivated when the parking brake is engaged.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking lights and instrument panel lights operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlights, parking lights and instrument panel lights
operation.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise from the parking lights and instrument panel
lights position to the first detent to turn the headlight
switch to the AUTO position. Rotate to the second detent
to turn on headlights, parking lights, and instrument panel
lights operation.
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Fog Light Control
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Fog Light Control
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
2
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Daytime Running Lights will turn on when the engine
is started and remain on unless the headlamps are turned
on, the parking brake is applied, or the ignition is placed in
the OFF position.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime Running
Lights will automatically deactivate when the front fog
lights are turned on.
If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was
purchased, the Daytime Running Lights can be turned
on and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 126.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may
deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side of the
vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on that side), or
on both sides of the vehicle (when the hazard warning
lights are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
After the low beam headlights are turned on, push the
multifunction lever, located on the left side of the steering
wheel, away from you to switch the headlights to high
beam. Pulling the multifunction lever back will turn the low
beams on.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP
C
ONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by
automatically controlling the high beams through the use
of a camera mounted on the windshield. This camera
detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches
from high beams to low beams until the approaching
vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control is
enabled through the Uconnect system
Ú page 126.
The multifunction lever must be in the high beam posi-
tion and the low beams must be turned on in order to
activate the Automatic High Beams.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
When set to AUTO, and the low beams are on and the
multifunction lever is in the high beam position, the
system automatically turns the high beams on or off
based on light levels of the approaching vehicles.
Vehicle speed must be greater than 22 mph (35 km/h)
to activate Automatic High Beams. Once activated,
Automatic High Beams will remain on until the speed
falls below 15 mph (25 km/h).
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will
cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain on,
until the lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch to the AUTO position for
automatic headlight operation. When the system is on, the
headlight time delay feature is also on. This means the
headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds (depending on
customer programmable time of 30, 60, or 90 seconds)
after you place the ignition in the OFF position. To turn the
automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of the
AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights will
come on in the automatic mode.
PARKING LIGHTS
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking lights and instrument panel lights operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlights, parking lights and instrument panel lights
operation.
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an OFF
detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the headlight
switch is placed in the parking lights position. However,
the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be activated along
with the front and rear marker lights. The DRLs may be
deactivated when the parking brake is engaged.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS WITH
WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
When this feature is programmed on and the headlight
switch is set to AUTO, the headlights will turn on after the
wipers are turned on. This feature will also turn the
headlights off when the wipers are turned off.
NOTE:
This feature can be turned on or off using the Uconnect
system Ú page 126.
HEADLIGHT TIME DELAY
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
vehicle in an unlit area.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds of placing the ignition in the
OFF position. The delay interval begins when the headlight
switch is turned off.
NOTE:
The headlight delay feature is automatically activated if
the customer leaves the headlight switch in the AUTO
position while the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place the
ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
feature.
The headlight delay time is programmable using the
Uconnect system
Ú page 126.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, the vehicle will chime to alert
the driver when the driver's door is opened.
FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch.
Fog Light Switch
Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or
the low beam headlights and push the headlight switch. To
turn off the front fog lights, either push the headlight
switch a second time or turn off the headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE:
The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or
parking lights on. However, selecting the high beam head-
lights will turn off the fog lights.
2
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TURN SIGNALS
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down to activate
the turn signals. The arrows on each side of the
instrument cluster display will flash to show proper
operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective LED turn
signal. Please see an authorized dealer for service.
A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display and a continuous chime will sound
if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with
either turn signal on.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
BATTERY SAVER
Timers are set to both the interior and exterior lights to
protect the life of your vehicle’s battery.
After 10 minutes, if the ignition is in the OFF position and
any door is left open or the dimmer control is rotated all
the way up to the dome light on position, the interior lights
will automatically turn off.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is placed in
the ON position.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is placed in
the OFF position, the exterior lights will automatically turn
off after eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and
left on for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the
exterior lights will automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the
OFF position. This will occur if the interior lights were
turned on manually or are on because a door is open. The
Battery Protection also includes the glove compartment
light and the cargo light. To restore interior light operation
after automatic battery protection is enabled (lights off),
either place the ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle
the light switch.
INTERIOR COURTESY LIGHTS
Front Map/Reading Lights
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overhead
console. Each light can be turned on by pushing a switch
on either side of the console. To turn the lights off, push
the switch a second time. These lights also turn on when
a door is opened, or when the unlock button on the key fob
is pushed, or when the dimmer control is turned
completely upward to the second detent.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
The instrument panel dimmer control is part of the
headlight switch and is located on the driver’s side of the
instrument panel.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the
instrument panel dimmer control upward to the first
detent will increase the brightness of text displays such as
the odometer, instrument cluster display, and radio.
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control completely
upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights.
The interior lights will remain on when the instrument
panel dimmer control is in this position.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Instrument Panel Dimmer (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control downward to
the O (off) position, and the interior lights will remain off
when the doors are open.
Ambient Light Control — If Equipped
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or downward
to increase or decrease the brightness of the ambient light
located in the overhead console, door handle lights, and
door map pocket lights.
Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer
Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer
(Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the key fob
to unlock the doors or open any door.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch
is placed in the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.
The courtesy lights will not turn off if the instrument panel
dimmer control is rotated upward to the second detent.
The courtesy lights will turn off after 10 minutes when the
ignition is placed in the OFF position to protect the battery.
The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
instrument panel dimmer control is rotated all the way
down to the O (off) position.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the
steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating
a switch, located on the end of the lever.
2
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
operation.
Windshield Wiper Operation
NOTE:
Do not operate the windshield wipers with the blades lifted
from the windshield.
Intermittent Wipers
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving speeds
above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be regulated from
a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles
(first detent), to a cycle every one second (fourth detent).
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay
times will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward you and
hold. If the lever is pulled while in the intermittent setting,
the wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles
after the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off position,
the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn
off.
Mist
Push the lever upward to the MIST position and release for
a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer pump;
therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the wind-
shield. The washer function must be used in order to spray
the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement, see
Ú page 219.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers. Rotate the end of the
multifunction lever to one of four detent positions to
activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay detent one is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most
sensitive.
Setting three is preferred by the average driver during
normal rain conditions.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind-
shield.
1 — Push Forward For Rear Washer
2 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
3 — Pull For Front Washer
4 — Rotate For Rear Wiper Operation
5 — Push Up For Mist
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
windshield wiper blades from returning to the parked
position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off,
and the blades cannot return to the parked position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield
during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the
defroster before and during windshield washer use.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Use of products containing wax or silicone may reduce
Rain Sensing performance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
using the Uconnect system Ú page 126.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is first
placed in the ON position, the Rain Sensing system will
not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle
speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h) or the outside
temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the ignition
is ON, and the transmission is in NEUTRAL, the Rain
Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch
is moved, vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/
h) or the gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL
position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped with
the Remote Start system, Rain Sensing wipers are not
operational when the vehicle is in the Remote Start
mode.
REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the
windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the
steering column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by
rotating a switch, located at the middle of the lever.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to
the first detent for intermittent operation and to
the second detent for continuous rear wiper
operation.
To use the washer, push the lever forward and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is
pushed while in the intermittent setting, the
wiper will turn on and operate for several wipe
cycles after the end of the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the off position,
the wiper will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn off.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the switch
is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the lever is
released the pump will resume normal operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is placed in
the OFF position, the wiper will automatically return to the
parked position.
WINDSHIELD WIPER DE-ICER —
I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield Wiper
De-Icer feature that may be activated under the following
conditions:
Activation By Front Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer shall be activated automatically in the case of
a cold weather manual start with full front defrost, and
when the ambient temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer shall be activated automatically when the rear
defrost is turned on and when the ambient tempera-
ture is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Remote Start Operation — When Remote
Start is active and the outside ambient temperature is
less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer
will activate. Exiting Remote Start will resume its
previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was
active, the timer and operation will continue.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
touchscreen and on the instrument panel below the radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display With Automatic
Temperature Controls
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on the
touchscreen to change the current setting to
the coldest output of air. The MAX A/C indicator
illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the
button again will cause the MAX A/C operation to exit. In
2
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to the desired user settings. Pressing other
settings will cancel MAX A/C.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate to change the current setting. The
A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is on. When
the A/C system is on, cool, dehumidified air will flow
through the outlets into the cabin.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate, to change the system between
Recirculation mode and outside air mode. The
Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate
when the Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions, such as smoke,
odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation
can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be
unavailable (button on the touchscreen grayed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually
without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous
use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air
stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this
mode is not recommended. Recirculation mode may
automatically adjust to optimize customer experience for
warming, cooling, dehumidification, etc.
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to
excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature may
be unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield.
Auto Button
Set your desired temperature and press AUTO.
AUTO will achieve and maintain your desired
temperature by automatically adjusting the
blower speed and air distribution. Air
Conditioning (A/C) may be active during AUTO operation to
improve performance. AUTO mode is highly recommended
for efficiency.
You can turn AUTO on in one of two ways:
Press and release this button on the touchscreen.
Push the button on the faceplate.
Toggling this function will cause the system to switch
between manual mode and automatic mode
Ú page 48.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost button on
the touchscreen, or push and release the
button on the faceplate, to change the current
airflow setting to Defrost mode. The Front
Defrost indicator illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air
comes from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower
level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side window
defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front defrost
mode button, the climate system will return to the
previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost button on
the touchscreen, or push and release the
button on the faceplate, to turn on the rear
window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The rear
window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating
elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And
Down Buttons
These buttons provide the driver and
passenger with independent temperature
control.
Push the red button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red arrow button
on the touchscreen for warmer temperature
settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue arrow button
on the touchscreen for cooler temperature
settings.
NOTE:
The numbers within the temperature display will only
appear if the system is equipped with an automatic
climate control system.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to
toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC
indicator illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC
synchronizes the passenger temperature
setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the
passenger’s temperature setting while in SYNC will
automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air
forced through the climate control system.
There are seven blower speeds available.
Adjusting the blower will cause automatic
mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be
selected using either the blower control knob on the
faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control
knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and
the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode
buttons on the touchscreen to change the
airflow distribution mode. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes
from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost
outlets, and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes
of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air
from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on the
touchscreen, or push the OFF button on the
faceplate to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
2
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC) — I
F EQUIPPED
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic
Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and
passenger temperature control buttons. Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the system will
achieve and automatically maintain that comfort
level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the US/Metric customer-program-
mable feature within the Uconnect system
Ú page 126.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in
speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be
turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the beep,
say one of the following commands:
“
Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“
Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may only be
used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle.
Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats
or steering wheel if equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested
control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling system is
functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and
concentration of coolant is used. Use of the Air
Recirculation mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control system
when the vehicle is being stored for an extended period of
time, see
Ú page 250.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed.
Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the air distribution box, they could plug the water
drains. In Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear
of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and pollen
from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your
cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system may
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
engine running condition.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
The Windshield Wiper De-Icer is a heating element located
at the base of the windshield.
It operates automatically once the following conditions are
met:
Activation By Front Defrost
The Windshield Wiper De-Icer activates automatically
during a cold weather manual start with
full defrost,
and when the
ambient temperature is below 33°F
(0.6°C).
Activation By Rear Defrost
The Windshield Wiper De-Icer activates automatically
when the Rear Defrost is operating and the
ambient
temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Remote Start Operation
When Remote Start is activated and the
outside
ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C) the
Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote
Start will resume its previous operation. If the Wind-
shield Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer and opera-
tion will continue.
Operating Tips Chart
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.
Glove Compartment
There is also an additional storage bin located above the
instrument panel in the center of the dash.
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And Vehicle
Interior Is Very Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel Mode),
(MAX A/C) on, and blower
on high. Roll down the
windows for a minute to
flush out the hot air. Adjust
the controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on, and set
the mode control to
(Panel Mode).
Cool Sunny
Operate in (Bi-Level
Mode).
Cool & Humid Conditions
Set the mode control to
(Mix Mode) and turn
(A/C) on to keep
windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode). If
windshield fogging starts
to occur, move the control
to (Mix Mode).
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove compartment in
the open position. Driving with the glove compartment
open may result in injury in a collision.
2
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Console Storage Compartment
The center console has both an upper and lower storage
area which can hold cell phones, PDAs, and other small
items.
Front Center Console
To access the upper storage compartment, lift the top
latch. To access the lower storage compartment, lift the
bottom latch.
Instrument Panel Cubby
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument panel
cubby. The cubby is located on the top of the instrument
panel, above the radio.
To open the instrument panel cubby, pull the latch toward
you and the cubby door will pop open.
Instrument Panel Cubby Latch
Instrument Panel Cubby Opened
To close the instrument panel cubby, push down on the
door until it latches.
AUX/USB CONTROL
Located in the front storage area, this feature allows an
external USB device or AUX electronic device to be
plugged into the port or jack.
Instrument Panel Media Hub
If equipped, there may also be a USB port in the center
console located to the left of the power outlet.
Third and fourth USB ports are located behind the center
console, by the power inverter (if equipped). Both are
charge only USB ports.
1 — Upper Storage Latch
2 — Lower Storage Latch
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment
lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision.
1 — USB Port
2 — AUX Port
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Charge Only USB Ports
If equipped with a Uconnect 4C/4C NAV with 8.4-inch
Display, refer to “Android Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in
the Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only USB
ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into a Media
USB port, a message will display on the touchscreen that
the device is not supported by the system.
POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics, and other low powered electrical accessories.
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” symbol
or a “battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is
powered. Power outlets labeled with a key symbol are
powered when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC
position, while the outlets labeled with a battery symbol
are connected directly to the battery and powered at all
times.
NOTE:
All accessories connected to the battery powered outlets
should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in
use to protect the battery against discharge.
The front power outlet is located in front of the gear
selector.
Front Power Outlet
A second fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the left
quarter trim panel in the cargo area. This power outlet has
power available when the ignition switch is in the ON or
ACC position.
Rear Power Outlet
NOTE:
The rear cargo power outlet can be changed to battery
powered at all times by switching the rear power outlet
fuse in the Power Distribution Center panel from fuse
location F91 to F81.
1 — Charge Only Type C USB And Type A USB Port
2 — Charge Only Type C USB And Type A USB Port
2
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Cargo Power Outlet Fuse Locations
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
Rear Center Console Power Inverter
There is a 115 Volt, 150 W inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 W.
Certain game consoles exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
To turn on the power inverter outlet, simply plug in the
device. The outlet automatically turns off when the device
is unplugged.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 W is exceeded, the
power inverter automatically shuts down. Once the
electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overloading
the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices
prior to using the inverter.
1 — F81 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (battery pow-
ered at all times)
2 — F91 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (powered
when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position)
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOW CONTROLS
The power window switches on the driver's door control all
the door windows.
Power Window Switches
The passenger door windows can also be operated by
using the single window switch on each passenger door
trim panel. The window switches will operate only when
the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
To open the window part way (manually), push the window
switch down to the first detent and release.
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
timing is programmable in the Uconnect system
Ú page 126.
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES
Auto-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and the front and
rear passenger doors window switches have an
Auto-Down feature.
Push the window switch down to the second detent and
release. The window will go down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down during the
Auto-Down operation, pull up or push down on the switch
briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up to the second detent and
release, and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-closure, it
will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove the
obstacle and use the window switch again to close the
window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the
auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure. If
this happens, pull the switch lightly and hold to close the
window manually.
RESET AUTO-UP
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open the
window completely and continue to hold the switch
down for an additional two seconds after the window
is fully open.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not leave
the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC
or ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
windows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear
your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the
window path before closing.
2
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim panel
allows you to disable the window controls on the rear
passenger doors. To disable the window controls, push
and release the window lockout button (the indicator light
on the button will turn on). To enable the window controls,
push and release the window lockout button again (the
indicator light on the button will turn off).
Power Window Lockout Switch
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open
or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence
and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE —
IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located to the left
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switches
The power shade switches are located to the right
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
Power Shade Switches
1 — Vent Sunroof Switch
2 — Open Sunroof Switch
3 — Close Sunroof Switch
1 — Open Sunshade
2 — Close Sunshade
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or
ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury
or death.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
OPENING AND CLOSING THE SUNROOF
The sunroof has two programmed open positions: comfort
stop position and full open position. The comfort stop
position is set to minimize wind buffeting when driving
with side windows closed and sunroof open. If the
sunshade is closed when initiating a sunroof open or vent
command, the sunshade will automatically open to the
half open position prior to the sunroof opening.
Express Open/Close
Push the switch rearward to open and release it within one
second, the sunroof will open to the comfort stop position
and automatically stop. Push the switch rearward and
release it again, the sunroof will open to the full open
position and automatically stop. This is called Express
Open.
Push the switch forward to close and release it within one
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop
automatically. This is called Express Close.
During Express Open or Express Close operation, any
movement of the sunshade switch will stop the shade.
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the switch rearward to open. The sunroof
will open to the comfort stop position and automatically
stop. Push the switch rearward and hold it again, the
sunroof will open to the full open position and
automatically stop.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
forward position.
Any release of the switch during open or close operation
will stop the sunroof movement. The sunroof will remain in
a partially opened position until the switch is operated and
held again.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE POWER
S
HADE
The sunshade has two programmed open positions: half
open and full open. When opening the sunshade from the
closed position the sunshade will always stop at the half
open position regardless of express or manual open
operation. The switch must be actuated again to continue
on to full open position.
If the sunroof is open or vented the sunshade cannot be
closed beyond the half open position. Pushing the
sunshade close switch when the sunroof is open/vented
and the sunshade is at half open position will first
automatically close sunroof prior to the sunshade closing.
Express Open/Close
Push the sunshade switch rearward to open and release it
within one second, the sunshade will open to the half open
position and stop automatically. Push and release the
switch again from the half open position and the
sunshade will open to the full open position and stop
automatically. This is called Express Open.
Push the sunshade switch forward to close and release it
within one second. If the sunroof is in closed position the
sunshade will full close automatically from any position. If
the sunroof is open or vented the sunshade will close to
the half open position and stop; push and release the
sunshade switch forward again to automatically close
both the sunroof and sunshade completely. This is called
Express Close.
During Express Open or Express Close operation, any
movement of the sunshade switch will stop the shade.
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the sunshade switch rearward to open. The
shade will open to the half open position and stop
automatically. Push and hold the sunshade switch
rearward again and the shade will open automatically to
the full open position.
Push and hold the sunshade switch forward to close. If the
sunroof is in closed position the sunshade will full close
from any position. If the sunroof is open or vented the
sunshade will close to the half open position and stop;
pushing and holding the sunshade switch forward again
will close both the sunroof and sunshade completely.
Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the
sunshade will remain in a partially opened position until
the switch is pushed again.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat
belt properly and make sure all passengers are also
properly secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury
may result.
WARNING!
2
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the closing of the
sunroof during the Express Close operation. If an
obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction
if this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch
Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the
sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
VENTING SUNROOF
Push and release the Vent switch within one-half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
IGNITION OFF OPERATION
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position. Opening either front door will
cancel this feature.
NOTE:
Ignition Off timing is programmable through the Uconnect
system
Ú page 126.
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel. Periodically check for and clear out any
debris that may have collected in the tracks.
HOOD
OPENING THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the
driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and pull the safety
latch release lever forward (toward you). The safety
latch release lever is located behind the front edge of
the hood, slightly off-center to the right.
Hood Safety Latch Release Lever Location
NOTE:
Vehicle must be at a stop and the gear selector must
be in PARK.
While lifting the hood, use both hands.
Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms are
not in motion and not in the lifted position.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
CLOSING THE HOOD
In one continuous motion, pull down on the front edge of
the hood with moderate force until the angle is below the
point where the gas props are no longer resisting. Then let
the hood continue to fall into the closed position on its
own.
LIFTGATE
TO UNLOCK/OPEN THE LIFTGATE
The power liftgate may be opened by pushing the key fob
liftgate button (if equipped) or by pushing the electronic
liftgate release handle
Ú page 22.
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within five
seconds to open the power liftgate. Once the liftgate is
open, pushing the button twice within five seconds a
second time will close the liftgate.
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by
pushing the liftgate button located on the instrument
panel to right of the headlight switch. If the liftgate is fully
open, the liftgate can be closed by pushing the liftgate
button located on the left rear trim panel, near the liftgate
opening. If the liftgate is in motion, pushing the liftgate
button located on the left rear trim panel will reverse the
liftgate.
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, push the Passive Entry button located to the left of
liftgate release handle to lock the liftgate and doors.
NOTE:
If all doors are programmed within Uconnect Settings to
unlock on first press, all doors will unlock when you push
the liftgate release handle. If the driver door is
programmed to unlock on first press within Uconnect
Settings
Ú page 126, the liftgate will unlock when you
push the liftgate release handle.
Liftgate Entry
NOTE:
Use the power door lock switch on either front door trim
panel or the key fob to lock and unlock the liftgate.
The manual door locks on the doors and the driver's
door lock cylinder will not lock and unlock the liftgate.
Power Liftgate Malfunction Procedure:
1. In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate,
the liftgate can be released by accessing the service
release feature in the latch. This can be done using
a 3 mm diameter screwdriver.
2. From inside the gate, an eyelet can be seen. Place the
screwdriver in the eyelet.
3. Rotate the screwdriver handle to actuate the lever
and release the latch.
4. If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time,
the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset
power liftgate functionality.
NOTE:
The liftgate can also be opened manually by pushing the
electronic liftgate release handle and pulling upward in
one fluid motion.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
1 — Passive Entry Button
2 — Liftgate Release Handle
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
2
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TO LOCK/CLOSE THE LIFTGATE
There are several different ways to close the liftgate:
Manually by grabbing the liftgate closing handle and
pulling in a downward motion to close the liftgate.
Release the handle when the liftgate takes over the
closing effort.
Key fob liftgate button (if equipped)
Hands-Free (if equipped)
Liftgate instrument panel button (if equipped)
Power Liftgate button on the pillar in the cargo area (if
equipped)
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, pushing the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry
lock/push button located to the left of the Back Up
Camera will lock the vehicle only.
The power liftgate may be closed by pushing the rear
power liftgate button, located in the upper left trim in the
liftgate opening. Pushing the button will only close the
liftgate. This button cannot be used to open the liftgate.
Rear Power Liftgate Button
HANDS-FREE LIFTGATE — IF EQUIPPED
Hands-Free Liftgate Activation Zone
To open or close the liftgate using hands-free activation,
use a straight in and out kicking motion under the vehicle
activation zone in the general location below the rear
license plate. Do not move your foot sideways or in a
sweeping motion or the sensors may not detect the
motion.
NOTE:
The activation zone is the same for vehicles equipped with
or without a trailer tow package.
When a valid kicking motion is completed, the liftgate will
chime, the hazard lights will flash and the liftgate will open
after approximately one second, or close after
approximately three seconds. These settings can be
enabled or disabled through the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 126.
NOTE:
Opening or closing the Hands-Free Liftgate requires a
valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
door handle. If a valid Passive Entry key fob is not
within 5 ft (1.5 m), the liftgate will not respond to any
kicks.
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature may be turned on or
off through the Uconnect system
Ú page 126.
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature should be turned off
during jacking, tire changing, manual car wash, and
vehicle service.
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature can be activated by
any metallic object making a similar in-and-out motion
under the rear fascia/bumper, such as cleaning using
a metal broom.
The Hands-Free Liftgate will only operate when the
transmission is in PARK.
If anything obstructs the Hands-Free Liftgate while it is
opening or closing, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed/open position, provided it meets
sufficient resistance.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
There are pinch sensors attached to the side of the lift-
gate opening. Light pressure anywhere along these
strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open posi-
tion.
If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop. If this occurs, the liftgate must be operated manu-
ally.
The power liftgate will release, but not power open, in
temperatures below −12°F (−24°C). Be sure to
remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate
before opening the liftgate.
If the liftgate is left open for an extended period of time,
the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset
power liftgate functionality.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with
temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
NOTE:
Allow the power system to open the liftgate. Manually
pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the liftgate
obstacle detection feature and stop the power operation
or reverse its direction.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Load Floor
The cargo load floor system has a load capacity of 300 lb
(136 kg).
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still
maintains some rear seating room
Ú page 28.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops
The tie-downs located on the cargo area floor should be
used to secure loads safely when the vehicle is moving.
Cargo tie-down loops are located on the trim panels.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do
not use the recirculation mode.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
WARNING!
Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child seat
tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a tie-down
could pull loose and allow the child seat to come
loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only the
anchors provided for child seat tethers.
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or left
door center pillar.
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to
sway.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or accident.
2
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Rear Storage Bins
The rear storage bins are located in the rear of the vehicle
on the sides of the load floor.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a
luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lb (68 kg), and it
should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is
placed on the roof rack. Check the straps frequently to be
sure that the load remains securely attached.
NOTE:
Crossbars can be purchased at an authorized dealer
through Mopar® parts.
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the
luggage rack, does not exceed the maximum vehicle load
capacity.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle,
particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury
or property damage. Follow the roof rack cautions when
carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity. Always
distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and
secure the load appropriately.
Long loads, which extend over the windshield, should
be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.
Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load. It is
recommended to not carry large flat loads, such as
wood panels or surfboards, which may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
Loads should always be secured to crossbars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supple-
mentary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting
mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the straps
frequently to be sure that the load remains securely
attached.
CAUTION!
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
61
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
3
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 63
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (RPM x
1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display
Ú page 63.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal range
indicates that the engine cooling system is oper-
ating satisfactorily.
The gauge will likely indicate a higher temperature
when driving in hot weather or up mountain
grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the
upper limits of the normal operating range.
5. Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel
tank when the ignition is in the ON/RUN mode.
The fuel pump symbol points to the side
of the vehicle where the fuel door is
located
Ú page 113.
NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check when the
ignition is first cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will
activate the display for viewing, and display the total miles
or kilometers in the odometer. The steering wheel
mounted controls allow you to scroll through and enter the
main menus and submenus.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
L
OCATION AND CONTROLS
The instrument cluster display features a driver interactive
display that is located in the instrument cluster.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You
may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your
vehicle overheats
Ú page 222.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H” pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
3
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The instrument cluster display menu items may consist of
the following:
The system allows the driver to select information by pushing
the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
Using the
up or down arrow button allows you to
cycle through the Main Menu Items.
Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title area.
Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
Using the
left or right arrow button allows you to
cycle through the submenu items of the Main menu item.
NOTE:
Holding the
up /down or left /right arrow
button will loop the user through the currently selected
menu or options presented on the screen.
Upon returning to a main menu, the last submenu
screen viewed within that main menu will be displayed.
OK Button
Push the
OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. To
reset displayed/selected features push and hold the
OK button for two seconds.
OIL LIFE RESET — IF EQUIPPED
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Your vehicle may be equipped with an
engine oil change indicator system.
The “Oil Change Required” message
will display in the instrument cluster
display for five seconds after a single
chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To turn
off the message temporarily, push and release the
OK
button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure.
Oil Life Reset
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition
in the ON/RUN mode (do not start the engine).
2. Navigate to “Oil Life” submenu in “Vehicle Info” in the
instrument cluster display.
3. Push and hold the
OK button until the gauge resets to
100%.
Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition
in the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in
the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MENU
I
TEMS
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display menu items display in the
center of the instrument cluster. Menu items may vary
depending on your vehicle features.
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 65
Speedometer
Push and release the
up or down arrow button
until the speedometer menu icon is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
OK
button to toggle units, mph or km/h (If Equipped), of the
speedometer.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the
up or down arrow button
until the Vehicle Info menu icon is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
left or
right arrow button to scroll through the information
submenus and push and release the
OK button to select
or reset the submenus.
Tire Pressure: This menu option will display the current
tire pressure. A low tire will be highlighted in red for the
7 inch cluster and it will be highlighted in white text for
the 3.5 inch cluster.
Coolant Temperature: This menu option will display the
current coolant temperature of the vehicle.
Transmission Temperature: This menu will display the
current transmission temperature of the vehicle.
Oil Temperature: This menu option will display the
current oil temperature level of the vehicle.
Oil Life: This menu option will display the current oil life
of the vehicle.
Battery Voltage: This menu option will display the
current voltage level of the battery.
Driver Assist
Push and release the
up or down arrow button
until the Driver Assist menu title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current ACC
and LaneSense system settings. The information
displayed depends on the status of ACC and LaneSense.
Push the ACC on/off button (located on the steering
wheel) until one of the following displays in the instrument
cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, and LaneSense is OFF, the
display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Push and release the SET + or the SET- button (located on
the steering wheel) and the following will display in the
instrument cluster display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity
occurs, which may include any of the following:
Distance Setting Change
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity
Ú page 92.
LaneSense — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current
LaneSense system settings. The information displayed
depends on LaneSense system status and the conditions
that need to be met Ú page 109.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the
up or down arrow button
until the Fuel Economy menu title is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Toggle the
left or right
arrow button to select the screen with or without current
fuel economy display. Push and hold the
OK button to
reset average fuel economy feature.
Range – The display shows the estimated distance (mi
or km) that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in
the tank. When the Range value is less than 10 miles
(16 km) estimated driving distance, the Range display
will change to a “LOW FUEL” message. Adding a signif-
icant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW
FUEL” message and a new Range value will display.
Range cannot be reset through the
OK button.
3
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will
greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle,
regardless of the Range displayed value.
Average – The display shows the average fuel economy
(MPG, L/100 km, or km/L) since the last reset.
Current – This display shows the current fuel economy
(MPG, L/100 km, or km/L) form while driving.
Trip Info
Push and release the
up or down arrow button
until the Trip menu title is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Toggle the
left or right arrow button
to select Trip A or Trip B. The Trip information will display
the following:
Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km) traveled
for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average fuel
economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of Trip A or Trip
B since the last reset.
Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of travel
since Trip A or Trip B has been reset.
Hold the
OK button to reset feature information.
Stop/Start – If Equipped
Push and release the
up or down arrow button
until the Stop/Start menu title is displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
Audio
Push and release the
up or down arrow button
until the Audio menu title is displayed in the instrument
cluster display.
Messages
Push and release the
up or down arrow button
until the Messages Menu Icon is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. This feature shows the number
of stored warning messages. Pushing the
left or
right arrow button will allow you to scroll through the
stored messages.
Screen Setup
Push and release the
up or down arrow button
until the Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. Push and release the
OK
button to enter the submenus and follow the prompts on
the screen as needed. The Screen Setup feature allows
you to change what information is displayed in the
instrument cluster as well as the location where that
information is displayed.
NOTE:
Based on the trim level and current status of the vehicle,
some options may not be available.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Gear Display — If Equipped
Full
Single
Odometer — If Equipped
On
Off
Defaults
Restore
Cancel
Upper Left or Right
None Compass Outside Temp.
Time Range to Empty
Average Econ
(MPG, km/L or
L/100km)
Current Econ
(MPG, km/L or
L/100km)
Trip A Distance Trip B Distance
Center
None Compass Outside Temp.
Time Range to Empty
Average Econ
(MPG, km/L or
L/100km)
Current Econ
(MPG, km/L or
L/100km)
Trip A Distance Trip B Distance
Audio Speedometer Menu Title
Favorite Menus
Speedometer Vehicle Info
Driver Assist
(show/hide)
Fuel Economy
(show/hide)
Trip Info (show/
hide)
Stop/Start
Audio (show/
hide)
(Stored)
Messages
Screen Setup
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 67
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
S
ELECTABLE ITEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to view the
following main menu items:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may
vary
Ú page 63.
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving
time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current
drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
instrument cluster display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at
a rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from load reduc-
tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate
a problem with the charging system
Ú page 69.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped),
and vehicle functions which can be effected by load
reduction:
Heated Seats / Vented Seats / Heated Wheel
Heated / Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
150W Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the
following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical
loads are larger than the capability of charging system.
The charging system is still functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads
(e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior
lights, overloaded power outlets +12 Volts, 150W,
USB ports) during certain driving conditions
(city driving, towing, frequent stopping).
Installing options like additional lights, upfitter elec-
trical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar
devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
(weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period with the
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
+12 Volts portable appliances like vacuum cleaner’s,
game consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery
Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior).
Check what may be plugged in to power outlets
+12 Volts, 150W, USB ports.
Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature).
Check the audio settings (volume).
Speedometer Vehicle Info Stop/Start
Audio Driver Assist Fuel Economy
Messages Screen Setup Trip
3
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load
and Ignition Off Draw currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving
time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if the
message is still present during consecutive trips and
the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not
help to identify the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/
or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive. Always refer to the information
in this chapter in the event of a failure indication. All active
telltales will display first if applicable. The system check
menu may appear different based upon equipment
options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are
optional and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver or
passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When the
ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on.
When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash
or remain on continuously and a chime will sound
Ú page 159.
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault with the air bag, and will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position. This light will illuminate with a single chime
when a fault with the air bag has been detected, it will stay
on until the fault is cleared. If the light is either not on
during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake light
turns on it may indicate that the parking brake
is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is
a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The
vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 69
The light will also turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It
does not show the degree of brake application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays on
while the engine is running, there may be a
malfunction with the charging system. Contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
This warning light will illuminate when the battery is not
charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is running,
there may be a malfunction with the charging system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a
fault with the EPS system Ú page 88.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
problem with the ETC system. If a problem is
detected while the vehicle is running, the light
will either stay on or flash depending on the
nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle
is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is
placed in the PARK (P) position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains on with the vehicle running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals
are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This light warns of an overheated engine
condition. If the engine coolant temperature is
too high, this indicator will illuminate and a
single chime will sound.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop
the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system is on, turn
it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle
the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service
Ú page 203.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the hood
is left open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low
engine oil pressure. A chime will sound when
this light turns on and a message “Oil Pressure
Low” will display in the message screen. If the
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
3
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
light turns on while driving, pull the vehicle to the side of
the road at a safe location, stop the vehicle, shut off the
engine as soon as possible, check the oil level and correct
the oil level if it is low. Contact an authorized dealer.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light may or may not indicate how much oil is in the
engine. If the oil level is low and corrected, the engine can
be restarted. Otherwise the vehicle should be serviced by
an authorized dealer
Ú page 208.
NOTE:
The light may flash, a message in the center of the dash
may display momentarily “low oil pressure” and a chime
may occur during sharp cornering maneuvers. If this
happen it may indicate a low oil level. The oil level should
be checked and dealer service performed if this occurs.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the
engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns
on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off
the engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a
high transmission fluid temperature. This may
occur with strenuous usage such as trailer
towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle
and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until the light
turns off. Once the light turns off, you may continue to
drive normally.
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the Vehicle
Security System is arming, and then will flash
slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault in the ACC system. Contact a local
authorized dealer for service
Ú page 92.
Electric Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the
Electric Park Brake is not functioning properly
and service is required. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The light
will turn on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required as soon as possible.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is
also not on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have the brake
system inspected by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
If the vehicle is driven with low oil levels severe engine
damage can occur. Have the vehicle checked
immediately.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated
you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact
with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a
fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature
Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe
transmission damage or transmission failure.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 71
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the
Electronic Stability Control system is Active.
The ESC Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is
activated. It should go out with the engine running. If the
ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this warning light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several
miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator Light
come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
if it was turned off previously.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately
2 gal (7.5 L) this light will turn on, and remain
on until fuel is added. A single warning chime
will sound with Low Fuel Warning.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low Ú page 212.
Service LaneSense Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
LaneSense system is not operating and
requires service. Please see an authorized
dealer.
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense Warning Light will be solid
yellow when the vehicle is approaching a lane
marker. The warning light will flash when the
vehicle is crossing the lane marker
Ú page 109.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator (MIL)
Warning Light
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors engine and
automatic transmission control systems. This
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF to ON/
RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine
start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on
through several typical driving styles. In most situations,
the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This
can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over
flammable substances such as dry plants, wood,
cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious
injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control
system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
3
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal a fault
with the Four-Wheel Drive system. If the light
stays on or comes on during driving, it means
that the Four-Wheel Drive system is not
functioning properly and that service is required. We
recommend you drive to the nearest service center and
have the vehicle serviced immediately.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate a fault in the
Forward Collision Warning System. Contact an
local authorized dealer for service
Ú page 154.
Service Stop / Start System Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Stop/
Start system is not functioning properly and
service is required. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the
Cruise Control System is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is
displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
lower than the recommended value and/or
that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not
be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
previously, the display will show the indications
corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure
warning light when one or more of your tires is significantly
underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
warning light illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
WARNING!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoid-
ing sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture occurs,
repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 73
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Active Speed Limiter Fault Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate to signal when there is
a fault detected with the Active Speed Limiter.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates that Forward Collision
Warning is off
Ú page 154.
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the 4WD Low mode. The front and rear
driveshafts are mechanically locked together
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear
reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels
Ú page 85.
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indicates when the rear axle lock has
been activated.
Wait To Start Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate for
approximately two seconds when the ignition is
turned to the RUN position. Its duration may be
longer based on colder operating conditions.
Vehicle will not initiate start until telltale is no longer
displayed.
NOTE:
The Wait To Start telltale may not illuminate if the intake
manifold temperature is warm enough.
Water In Fuel Indicator Light — If Equipped
The Water In Fuel Indicator Light will illuminate
when there is water detected in the fuel filter. If
this light remains on, DO NOT start the vehicle
before you drain the water from the fuel filter to
prevent engine damage, and please see an authorized
dealer.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Active Speed Limiter SET Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the Active Speed
Limiter is on and set to a specific speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Vehicle Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and a
vehicle in front is detected
Ú page 92.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equipment
that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. After-
market wheels can cause sensor damage. Using after-
market tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inopera-
ble. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recom-
mended that you take your vehicle to an authorized
dealer to have your sensor function checked.
CAUTION!
The presence of water in the fuel system circuit may
cause severe damage to the injection system and
irregular engine operation. If the indicator light is
illuminated, contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to bleed the system. If the previously
mentioned indications come on immediately after
refuelling, water has probably been poured into the
tank: switch the engine off immediately and contact an
authorized dealer.
3
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without
Target Vehicle Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This will display the distance setting for the ACC
system when the system is engaged
Ú page 92.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cruise control is set to the desired speed
Ú page 90.
Front Fog Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front fog lights are on
Ú page 39.
LaneSense Indicator Light —
If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid
green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” and ready
to provide visual and torque warnings if an
unintentional lane departure occurs
Ú page 109.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
parking lights or headlights are turned on
Ú page 39.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
This telltale will illuminate when the Stop/Start
function is in “Autostop” mode.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated,
the turn signal indicator will flash
independently and the corresponding exterior
turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be
activated when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indi-
cator flashes at a rapid rate.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Active Speed Limiter Ready Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Active Speed
Limiter is on, but not set.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator shows when the Hill Descent
Control (HDC) feature is turned on. The light will
be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only
be armed when the transfer case is in the 4WD
Low position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph
(48 km/h). If these conditions are not met while
attempting to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light
will flash on/off.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, but not
armed, the LaneSense indicator light
illuminates solid white. This occurs when only
left, right, or neither lane line has been
detected. If a single lane line is detected, the system is
ready to provide only visual warnings if an unintentional
lane departure occurs on the detected lane line
Ú page 109.
Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when “Selec-Speed
Control” is activated.
To activate “Selec-Speed Control”, ensure the
vehicle is in Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) Low and
push the button on the Instrument Panel.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, “To Enter Selec-Speed
Shift to 4WD Low” will appear in the instrument cluster
display.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 75
(Continued)
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the Cruise Control
has been turned on, but not set
Ú page 90.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the high beam headlights are on. With the
low beams activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever
rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the
high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever toward
you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to pass”
scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and transmission
control systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance
and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although
your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have an OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information related to
the performance of your emissions controls. Authorized
service technicians may need to access this information to
assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system
Ú page 126.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the
Malfunction Indicator Light is functioning and is
not on when the engine is running, and that the
OBD II system is ready for testing.
The OBD ll system may not be ready if your vehicle was
recently serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a
battery replacement. If the OBD ll system should be
determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail
the test.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further
damage to the emission control system. It could also
affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle
must be serviced before any emissions tests can be
performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II
connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including
personal information.
WARNING!
3
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this
test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle's OBD II system is
not ready and you
should
not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illu-
minated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
tion or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is
not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the previously mentioned test
routine may then indicate that the system is
now ready.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
77
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL (N)
or PARK (P) position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
NORMAL STARTING
Press the brake pedal and place the ignition in the START
position and release when the engine starts. If the engine
fails to start within 10 seconds:
1. Place the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Wait 10 to 15 seconds.
3. Repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the vehicle.
Torque performance of the vehicle could be reduced if
both pedals are pressed at the same time. If pressure is
detected on both pedals simultaneously, a warning
message will display in the instrument cluster
Ú page 63.
Tip Start Feature
Place the ignition in the START position and release it as
the starter engages. The starter motor will automatically
disengage itself once the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in
10 seconds. If this occurs:
1. Place the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Wait 10 to 15 seconds.
3. Repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
EXTREME COLD WEATHER
(B
ELOW –20°F OR −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater
(available from an authorized dealer) is recommended.
EXTENDED PARK STARTING
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has not
been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the
battery to ensure a full battery charge during the
crank cycle.
2. Place the ignition in the START position and release it
when the engine starts. For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
ignition systems, press and hold the brake pedal
while pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, place
the ignition in the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds
to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the Extended
Park Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat
the procedure.
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. If equipped
with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in OFF position, remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
4
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure and the vehicle has not
experienced an Extended Park condition as previously
defined, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it there while the engine is
cranking. This should clear any excess fuel in case the
engine is flooded. The starter motor will engage
automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then disengage.
Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal and the
brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the
recommended viscosity and quality grades see
Ú page 256.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-
preted as a problem.
PARKING BRAKE
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB that offers simple
operation, and some additional features that make the
parking brake more convenient and useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is applied. Also,
be certain to leave the transmission in PARK (P).
You can engage the parking brake in two ways:
Manually, by applying the EPB switch.
Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake feature
in the customer programmable features
Ú page 132.
The EPB switch is located in the center console, behind
the gear selector.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait
10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of
start can be dangerous if done improperly
Ú page 200.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in
the engine or damage may result.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
STARTING AND OPERATING 79
(Continued)
EPB Switch
To apply the parking brake manually, pull up on the EPB
switch momentarily. You may hear a sound from the back
of the vehicle while the parking brake engages. Once the
parking brake is fully engaged, the red Brake Warning
Light in the instrument cluster and an indicator on the
switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake pedal
while you apply the parking brake, you may notice a small
amount of brake pedal movement. The parking brake can
be applied even when the ignition switch is OFF but the
Brake Warning Light will not illuminate. The parking brake
can only be released when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
The EPB Warning Light will illuminate if the EPB switch is
held for longer than 90 seconds in either the released or
applied position. The light will extinguish upon releasing
the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking
brake will automatically engage whenever the
transmission is placed into PARK, while the ignition is
turned OFF. If your foot is on the brake pedal, you may
notice a small amount of brake pedal movement while the
parking brake is engaging.
The parking brake will release automatically when the
ignition is ON, the transmission is in DRIVE (D) or REVERSE
(R) and the driver seat belt is buckled.
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition switch
must be in the ON/RUN position. Put your foot on the
brake pedal, then push the EPB switch down momentarily.
You may hear a sound from the back of the vehicle while
the parking brake disengages. You may also notice a small
amount of movement in the brake pedal. Once the parking
brake is fully disengaged, the Brake Warning Light in the
instrument cluster and the LED indicator on the switch will
extinguish.
NOTE:
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from
the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake before
placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always turn the ignition off,
secure the key fob and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the
ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
4
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 STARTING AND OPERATING
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to
engage the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion,
maintain upward pressure on the EPB switch for as long as
engagement is desired. The Brake Warning Light will
illuminate, and a continuous chime will sound. The rear
stop lamps will also be illuminated automatically while the
vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is in
motion, release the EPB switch. If the vehicle is brought to
a complete stop using the parking brake, when the vehicle
reaches approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) the parking brake
will remain engaged.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB system, a
yellow EPB Warning Light will illuminate. This may be
accompanied by the Brake Warning Light flashing. In this
event, urgent service of the EPB system is required. Do not
rely on the parking brake to hold the vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The EPB can be programmed to be applied automatically
whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and the automatic
transmission is placed in PARK, whenever the ignition is
turned OFF. Auto Park Brake is enabled and disabled by
customer selection through the customer programmable
features
Ú page 132.
Any single Auto Park Brake application can be bypassed by
pushing the EPB switch to the release position while the
transmission is placed in PARK.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system that will
engage the parking brake automatically if the vehicle is
left unsecured while the ignition is in ON/RUN position.
The parking brake will automatically engage if all of the
following conditions are met:
The vehicle is at a standstill.
There is no attempt to press the brake pedal or accel-
erator pedal.
The driver seat belt is unbuckled.
The driver door is open.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pressing the
brake pedal and pushing the EPB Switch while the driver
door is open. Once manually bypassed, SafeHold will be
enabled again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h)
or the ignition is turned to the OFF position and back to ON
again.
Brake Maintenance Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by an
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. You
should only enter Brake Maintenance mode during brake
service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for
you or your technician to push the rear piston into the rear
caliper bore. With the EPB system, this can only be done
after retracting the EPB actuator. Fortunately, actuator
retraction can be done easily by entering the Brake
Maintenance mode through the Uconnect Settings in your
vehicle. This menu-based system will guide you through
the steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator in order to
perform rear brake service.
Maintenance mode has requirements that must be met in
order to be activated:
The vehicle must be at a standstill.
The parking brake must be unapplied.
The transmission must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
While in Maintenance Mode, the EPB Warning Light will
flash continuously while the ignition is ON.
When brake service work is complete, the following steps
must be followed to reset the parking brake system to
normal operation:
Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
Apply the EPB Switch.
WARNING!
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged, or
repeated use of the parking brake to slow the vehicle,
may cause serious damage to the brake system. Be
sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a
collision.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Do only that service work for which you have
the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
STARTING AND OPERATING 81
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out
of PARK.
KEY IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the OFF (key removal) position.
The key fob can only be removed from the ignition when
the ignition is in the OFF position, and the transmission is
locked in PARK whenever the ignition is in the OFF
position.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are
applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN position (engine running or not)
and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds.
9-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both
beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To
select a gear range, push the lock button on the gear
selector and move the selector rearward or forward. You
must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission
out of PARK (or NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped or
moving at low speeds). Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL
(N) if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and
remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the OFF
(key removal) position, (or, with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™, when the ignition is in the OFF position)
the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
tion is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting
the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or
DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
4
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
NOTE:
The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; there-
fore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be some-
what abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision
shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilome-
ters).
In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector
position and the actual transmission gear (for example,
driver selects REVERSE while driving forward), the posi-
tion indicator will blink continuously until the selector is
returned to the proper position, or the requested shift
can be completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions.
The 9-speed transmission has been developed to meet
the needs of current and future FWD/AWD vehicles.
Software and calibration is refined to optimize the
customer’s driving experience and fuel economy. By
design, some vehicle and driveline combinations utilize
NINTH gear only in very specific driving situations and
conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and MANUAL (AutoStick) shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift
control. Moving the gear selector into the MANUAL (-/+)
position (beside the DRIVE position) activates AutoStick
mode, providing manual shift control and displaying the
current gear in the instrument cluster (as 1, 2, 3, etc.).
Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while
in the MANUAL position will manually select the
transmission gear
Ú page 84.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward), it
is probably in the MANUAL (AutoStick [+/-]) position
(beside the DRIVE position). In MANUAL (AutoStick) mode,
the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the
instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to the right
(into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE,
and NEUTRAL.
Gear Selector
GEAR RANGES
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting out of
PARK or NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the
selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is espe-
cially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the engine off.
Remove the key fob.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting
the vehicle.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
STARTING AND OPERATING 83
(Continued)
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the
gear selector and firmly move the selector all the way
forward until it stops and is fully seated.
Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position.
With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the
engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is
not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could
lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or some-
thing. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling
normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake
pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and
remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the OFF
(key removal) position (or, with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™,
when the ignition is in the OFF position), the trans-
mission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
tion is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
WARNING!
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition
to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that
limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
If Recreational Towing see
Ú page 120.
If Towing A Disabled Vehicle see
Ú page 205.
4
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head
winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick
shift control to select a lower gear
Ú page 84. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating
limits, the transmission controller may modify the
transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or
expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement.
This is done to prevent transmission damage due to
overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light may illuminate,
and the transmission may operate differently until the
transmission cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature
improves warm-up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch, and shifts into EIGHTH or NINTH gear,
are inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm
Ú page 85. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
SPORT — If Equipped
This mode alters the transmission's automatic shift
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are increased
to make full use of available engine power.
SPORT mode is activated using the rotary switch on the
center console
Ú page 88.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in a fixed gear, or may remain in NEUTRAL.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
Limp Home mode may allow the vehicle to be driven to an
authorized dealer for service without damaging the
transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to
normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that
you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible
convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
equipment to assess the condition of your transmission. If
the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control of
the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This feature can
also provide you with more control during passing, city
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing and many other situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick position (beside
the DRIVE position), it can be moved forward and
rearward. This allows the driver to manually select the
transmission gear being used. Moving the gear selector
forward (-) triggers a downshift, and rearward (+) an
upshift. The current gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
NOTE:
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only shift up or
down when the driver moves the gear selector rearward (+)
or forward (-), except as follows:
The transmission will automatically upshift when
necessary to prevent engine overspeed.
The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
STARTING AND OPERATING 85
The transmission will automatically downshift to FIRST or
SECOND gear (depending on model) when coming to a
stop. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift (+)
the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.
You can start out (from a stop) in FIRST or SECOND
gear. Starting out in SECOND gear can be helpful in
snow or icy conditions. Tap the gear selector forward or
rearward to select the desired gear after the vehicle is
brought to a stop.
If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
overspeed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of
a vehicle speed.
Avoid using Cruise Control when AutoStick is engaged
because the transmission will not shift automatically.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to
the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick
position at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different
feeling or response during normal operation in the upper
gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some
accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE:
The torque converter clutch will not engage until the trans-
mission fluid is warm (usually after 1 to 3 miles [2 to 5 km]
of driving). Because the engine speed is higher when the
torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if
the transmission is not shifting properly when cold. This is
normal. The torque converter clutch will function normally
once the transmission is sufficiently warm.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
1-SPEED FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
(4WD) — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides on-demand four-wheel drive (4WD).
The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional
driving skills required. Under normal driving conditions,
the front wheels provide most of the traction. If the front
wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted
automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front
wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the
rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle input
(where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be sent to
the rear in a preemptive effort to improve vehicle launch
and performance characteristics.
2-SPEED FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
(4WD) — I
F EQUIPPED
2-Speed 4x4 Switch
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire size
may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
4
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 STARTING AND OPERATING
2-Speed 4x4 Switch (with Rear Lock)
The Four-Wheel Drive is fully automatic in the normal
driving mode. The Selec-Terrain buttons provide three
selectable mode positions:
4WD LOW
REAR LOCK (If Equipped)
N (NEUTRAL)
When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOW range
position can be used to provide an additional gear
reduction, which allows for increased torque to be
delivered to both the front and rear wheels. 4WD LOW is
intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in
4WD LOW on dry, hard-surfaced roads may cause
increased tire wear and damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the normal
driving mode at a given road speed. Take care not to
overspeed the engine, and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause
damage to the driveline components.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
SHIFT POSITIONS
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
4WD system mode position, see the information below:
N (NEUTRAL)
This range disengages the driveline from the powertrain. It
is to be used for flat towing behind another vehicle
Ú page 120.
4WD LOW
This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It provides an
additional gear reduction which allows for increased
torque to be delivered to both the front and rear wheels
while providing maximum pulling power for loose, slippery
road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
NOTE:
For further information on the various positions and their
intended uses
Ú page 88.
SHIFTING PROCEDURES
Shifting Into 4WD LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the
ignition in the ON/RUN position and the engine running,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N), and push the
4WD LOW button once. The 4WD LOW indicator light in the
instrument cluster will begin to flash and remain on solid
when the shift is complete.
4WD LOW Button
NOTE:
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a message will
flash from the instrument cluster display with instructions
on how to complete the requested shift
Ú page 63.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit in the N
(NEUTRAL) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The N (NEUTRAL) position disengages
both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain
and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
unless the vehicle is otherwise secured (for example,
when attached to the tow vehicle).
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
STARTING AND OPERATING 87
Shifting Out Of 4X4 LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the
ignition in the ON/RUN position and the engine running,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N), and push the
4WD LOW button once. The 4WD LOW indicator light in the
instrument cluster will flash and go out when the shift is
complete.
NOTE:
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a message
will flash from the instrument cluster display with
instructions on how to complete the requested shift
Ú page 63.
Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may
occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly
aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch
teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The
preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to 3 mph
(0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle is moving faster than
3 mph (5 km/h), the 4WD system will not allow the
shift.
REAR ELECTRONIC LOCKER SYSTEM —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Rear Electronic Locker System features a mechanical
locking rear differential to provide better traction in the
4WD LOW position. The REAR LOCK button is on the
Selec-Terrain Knob.
Activating The Rear Electronic Locker System
To activate the Rear Electronic Locker System, the
following conditions must be met:
1. The 4WD system must be in 4WD LOW.
2. The ignition in the ON/RUN position and the engine
running.
3. Vehicle speed must be below 15 mph (24 km/h).
4. To engage the Rear Electronic Locker, push the REAR
LOCK button once.
Rear Lock Button
Deactivating The Rear Electronic Locker System
To deactivate the Rear Electronic Locker System, the
following conditions must be met:
1. Rear Electronic Locker must be engaged, and the
REAR LOCK indicator light on.
2. The ignition in the ON/RUN position and the engine
running.
3. To disengage Rear Electronic Locker, push the REAR
LOCK button once.
NOTE:
It may also be necessary to drive slowly steering back
and forth to complete engagement and disengage-
ment of the Electronic Locker.
When engaging Rear Electronic Locker, the indicator
lights in the instrument cluster and on the REAR LOCK
button will begin to flash. When the shift is complete
the REAR LOCK indicator lights will remain on.
When disengaging Rear Electronic Locker, the indi-
cator lights in the instrument cluster and on the REAR
LOCK button will begin to flash. When the shift is
complete the REAR LOCK indicator lights will remain
off.
Shifting into or out of Rear Electronic Locker is possible
with the vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty
may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being
properly aligned. Several attempts may be required for
clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur.
The preferred method is for the vehicle to be rolling,
below 15 mph (24 km/h), while including right and left
steering maneuvers to allow for the clutch teeth to
align.
The Rear Electronic Locker System must be disen-
gaged prior to taking the vehicle out of 4WD LOW
range. If 4WD LOW shift conditions/interlocks are not
met, a message will flash from the instrument cluster
display with instructions on how to complete the
requested shift.
4
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 STARTING AND OPERATING
SELEC-TERRAIN
DESCRIPTION
Selec-Terrain allows the driver to specify the driving
surface to allow the vehicle systems to provide the best
performance possible across a wide range of conditions.
Rotate the Selec-Terrain knob to select the desired mode.
Selec-Terrain Switch
Selec-Terrain offers the following modes:
AUTO — Fully automatic, full-time four-wheel drive oper-
ation can be used on and off-road. Balances traction
with a seamless steering feel to provide improved
handling and acceleration.
SNOW — Tuning set for additional stability in inclement
weather. Use when driving on loose traction surfaces
such as snow, while either on or off-road. When in
SNOW mode (depending on certain operating condi-
tions), the transmission may use SECOND gear (rather
than FIRST gear) during launches, to minimize wheel
slippage.
SPORT — This mode alters the transmission's auto-
matic shift schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds
are increased to make full use of available engine
power.
NOTE:
SPORT mode is not available when 4WD LOW is selected.
SAND/MUD — Off-road calibration for use on low trac-
tion surfaces such as mud, sand, or wet grass. The
4WD system provides maximum capability to all
wheels. Some binding may be felt on high traction
surfaces. The electronic brake system will be adjusted
to reduce the automatic braking of slipping wheels and
to allow the engine to operate without restriction.
ROCK — Off-road calibration is only available in 4WD
LOW range. ROCK mode provides the most aggressive
four-wheel drive performance for extreme off-road
terrain. Use for low speed obstacles such as large
rocks, deep ruts, etc. The driver may notice additional
tire scrubbing and steering wheel feedback while
driving in ROCK mode on higher traction off-road
surfaces. For use only in off-road driving situations.
NOTE:
ROCK mode is only available on the vehicles equipped
with the Off-Road package.
Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec-Speed
Control for steep downhill control Ú page 143.
Instrument Cluster Display Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
appear in the instrument cluster
Ú page 63.
POWER STEERING
The power steering system will provide increased vehicle
response and ease of maneuverability. The power steering
system adapts to different driving conditions.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” or “POWER
STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE SYSTEM”
message and a steering wheel icon are
displayed on the instrument cluster display
screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to
an authorized dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has
lost power steering assistance
Ú page 68.
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM HOT - PERFORMANCE
MAY BE LIMITED” message and an icon are displayed on
the instrument cluster display screen, it indicates that
extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred, which
caused an over temperature condition in the power
steering system. You will lose power steering assistance
momentarily until the over temperature condition no
longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, pull over
and let the vehicle idle for a few moments until the light
turns off
Ú page 68.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
STARTING AND OPERATING 89
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no longer oper-
ational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at low speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer for
service.
STOP/START SYSTEM
The Stop/Start system was designed to reduce fuel
consumption. The system will stop the engine
automatically during a vehicle stop if the required
conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal or pressing
the accelerator pedal will automatically restart the engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy-duty battery,
starter, as well as other engine parts, to handle the
additional engine starts.
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal
customer engine start. At that time, the system will go into
STOP/START READY.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
“STOP/START READY” message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start
section
Ú page 63.
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The gear selector must be in a forward gear and the
brake pedal pressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to the
zero position, and the Stop/Start indicator light will
illuminate indicating you are in Autostop. Customer
settings will be maintained upon return to an
engine-running condition.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/Start
system may be viewed in the instrument cluster display
Stop/Start Screen. In the following situations, the engine
will not stop:
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled
Driver’s door is not closed
Battery temperature is too warm or cold
Battery charge is low
The vehicle is on a steep grade
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an accept-
able cabin temperature has not been achieved
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed
HVAC is set to MAX A/C
Engine has not reached normal operating temperature
The transmission is not in a forward or reverse gear
Hood is open
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure with
vehicle in DRIVE (D) position
Accelerator pedal input
Engine temperature is too high
5 mph (8 km/h) threshold has not been achieved from
previous Autostop
Steering angle is beyond threshold
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme conditions of the
items listed previously.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
A
UTOSTOP MODE
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the
brake pedal is released or the accelerator pedal is
pressed. The transmission will automatically re-engage
upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
The transmission gear selector is moved out of DRIVE,
except in the PARK position
To maintain cabin temperature comfort
HVAC is set to full defrost mode
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted
Battery voltage drops too low
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed
A Stop/Start system error occurs
Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold
4
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 STARTING AND OPERATING
Conditions That Force An Application Of The Electric Park
Brake While In Autostop Mode:
The driver’s door is open and brake pedal released
The driver’s door is open and the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled
The engine hood has been opened
A Stop/Start system error occurs
If the Electric Park Brake (EPB) is applied with the engine
off, the engine may require a manual restart and the EPB
may require a manual release (press brake pedal and
push EPB switch).
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Stop/Start OFF Switch
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will illuminate. The “STOP/
START OFF” message will appear in the instrument cluster
display and the Autostop mode will be disabled
Ú page 63.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to the ON
mode every time the ignition is turned OFF and back ON.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE STOP/
START SYSTEM” message and a yellow Stop/Start telltale
will appear in the instrument cluster display
Ú page 68.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears
in the instrument cluster display, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise Control
system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system:
Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a constant
preset speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the vehicle
speed up to the preset speed to maintain a distance
with the vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not enabled,
Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehicles
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the feature
selected.
Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a time.
For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control is enabled,
Adaptive Cruise Control will be unavailable, and vice
versa.
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 20 mph (32 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
1 — On/Off
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (+)/Accel
4 — RES/Resume
5 — SET (-)/Decel
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
STARTING AND OPERATING 91
NOTE:
Do not place the gear selector in NEUTRAL when Cruise
Control is activated. Doing so will disengage the system.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise Control. The
cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster display will
illuminate. To turn the system off, push the on/off button
a second time. The cruise indicator light will turn off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has reached
the desired speed, push and release the SET (+) or SET (-)
button. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been
set, a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)”
will appear indicating the set speed. A cruise control
indicator light, along with set speed will also appear and
stay on in the instrument cluster when the speed is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the SET
(+) button, or decrease speed by pushing
the SET
(-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Control is set, press the accelerator to
pass as you would normally. When the pedal is released,
the vehicle will return to the set speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and down
hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Cruise Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control
and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control in
heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
covered or slippery.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not in use is
dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control
and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control in
heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
covered or slippery.
4
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button, or
normal brake pressure will deactivate the Cruise Control
system without erasing the set speed from memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the Cruise
Control without erasing the set speed from memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in the OFF
position, will erase the set speed from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by Cruise Control while traveling on
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety
system and not designed to prevent collisions. The Cruise
Control function performs differently
Ú page 90.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged in light
to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need
to reset your Cruise Control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor
and a forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle
directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed the
original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset
following distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to
the vehicle will affect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning system.
Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehicles
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the feature
selected
Ú page 262.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driver involve-
ment. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions,
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead and,
most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a colli-
sion and death or serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehi-
cles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped
vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
tions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop and
hold the vehicle in the stop position for approxi-
mately three minutes when following a vehicle
ahead. If the vehicle ahead does not start
moving within three minutes, the parking brake
will be activated, and the ACC system will be
canceled.
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situa-
tions (i.e., in highway construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off-ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or
downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe driving at
a constant speed.
WARNING!
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
STARTING AND OPERATING 93
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel operate
the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC
system settings. The information it displays depends on
ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button until
one of the following appears in the instrument cluster
display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed, the
display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instrument
cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of the
following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready state, the
instrument cluster display will read “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
When in 4WD Low
When the brakes are applied
When the parking brake is applied
When the transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or
NEUTRAL
When the vehicle speed is below the minimum speed
range
When the brakes are overheated
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
When there is a stationary vehicle in front of your
vehicle in close proximity
When ESC Full Off mode is active
1 — CANC/Cancel
2 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off
3 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
4 — Distance Decrease Button
5 — SET (+)/Accel
6 — RES/Resume
7 — SET (-)/Decel
8 — Distance Increase Button
4
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster display
will read “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the
system will turn off and the instrument cluster display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET
(+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The
instrument cluster display will show the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without ACC
enabled. To change between the different modes, push
the
ACC on/off button which turns the ACC and the Fixed
Speed Cruise Control off. Pushing the
Fixed Speed Cruise
Control on/off button will result in turning on (changing to)
Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is
below
20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed will default to 20 mph (32 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below 20 mph
(32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is
above
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can cause
the vehicle to continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs, the message “DRIVER OVERRIDE”
will display in the instrument cluster display.
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set speed
while ACC is enabled, the system will not be controlling
the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. The vehicle speed will only be determined by
the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed Speed
Cruise Control systems:
The brake pedal is applied
The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates
The vehicle parking brake is applied
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode
The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated)
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC system:
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
4WD Low is engaged
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always leave
the system off when you are not using it.
WARNING!
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the system will not
react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even
if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither
the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
STARTING AND OPERATING 95
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES (resume)
button and remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
The instrument cluster display will show the last set
speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is being
used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph (0 km/h)
when ACC is active.
NOTE:
If your vehicle stays at a standstill for longer than two
seconds, then the driver will either have to push the
RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
reengage the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) to the
existing set speed.
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET
(+) button, or decrease speed by pushing
the SET
(-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the button
is released. The new set speed is reflected in the instru-
ment cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET
(+) button or SET (-)
buttons, the new set speed will be the current speed of the
vehicle.
When ACC Is Active
When you use the SET
(-) button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle suffi-
ciently to reach the set speed, the brake system will
automatically slow the vehicle.
The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop
when following a vehicle in front. If your vehicle follows
the vehicle in front to a standstill, after two seconds the
driver will either have to push the RES (resume) button,
or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to
the existing set speed.
The ACC system maintains set speed when driving
uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may
occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This
is normal operation and necessary to maintain set
speed. When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds
normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting appears in the instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic and
road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is
too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road
conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or
decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and death
or serious personal injury.
4
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 STARTING AND OPERATING
Distance Settings
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance
Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance
Decrease button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the instrument cluster display will show the
ACC Set With Target Detected Indicator Light, and the
system will adjust the vehicle speed automatically to
maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the
set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the
sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages
Ú page 94.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however,
the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system
applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that
its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the
set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will
flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster display is a
warning for the driver to take action and does not neces-
sarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is
applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) engaged
and following a vehicle, the system will provide an
additional acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist
in passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration is
triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn signal and
will only be active when passing on the left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to a
standstill while following the vehicle in front, if the vehicle
in front starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle
coming to a standstill, your vehicle will resume motion
without the need for any driver action.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the driver
will either have to push the RES (resume) button, or apply
the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing
set speed.
NOTE:
After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a standstill for
approximately three consecutive minutes, the parking
brake will be activated, and the ACC system will be
canceled.
While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the
driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened,
the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system
will be canceled.
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
STARTING AND OPERATING 97
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF
VEHICLE” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and a chime will sound when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt
or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
display this message and the system will deactivate.
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow, or tunnels with
reflective tiles). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still
available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is important
to note the following maintenance items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see an authorized dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near the
sensor, including transparent material or aftermarket
grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at an
authorized dealer.
Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an after-
market grille or modifying the grille is not recom-
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC/FCW operation.
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display, and a chime will sound
when conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as
mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of
glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
read “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” and the system will have degraded
performance.
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will
recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare
conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles
or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rearview mirror. They may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is no
longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once
on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing
camera inspected at an authorized dealer.
SERVICE ACC/FCW WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display
reads “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or
“Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be
an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that
limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily
unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again later,
following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see an
authorized dealer.
4
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 STARTING AND OPERATING
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or
unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need
to intervene. The following are examples of these types of
situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
Towing a trailer is not recommended when using ACC.
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may increase or decrease the vehicle speed for stability,
with no vehicle ahead detected. Once the vehicle is out of
the curve, the system will resume your original set speed.
This is a part of normal ACC system functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
USING ACC ON HILLS
ACC performance may be limited when driving on hills.
ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane depending on
the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hill.
ACC Hill Example
LANE CHANGING
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the following lane
changing example, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle
changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's
too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may not
detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There
may not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing
vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes
if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
STARTING AND OPERATING 99
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does not react to stationary objects or vehicles. For
example, ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle
you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is
stopped in your lane. It will consider this stopped vehicle a
stationary object as it did not previously detect movement
from it. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes
if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear, and
if equipped, the front fascia/bumper and a detected
obstacle when backing up or moving forward (e.g. during a
parking maneuver). The vehicle brakes may be
automatically applied and released when performing a
reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a possible
collision with an obstacle.
NOTE:
The driver can disable the automatic braking function
by turning ParkSense off via the ParkSense switch. The
driver can also override automatic braking by changing
the gear or by pressing the gas pedal over 90% of its
capacity during the braking event.
Automatic brakes are not available if the vehicle is in
4WD Low.
Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
The automatic braking function may only be applied if
the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid colliding
with a detected obstacle.
The automatic braking function may not be applied fast
enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of the
vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
The automatic braking function can be enabled/
disabled from the Customer Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect system.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
for the automatic braking function through ignition
cycles.
4
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 STARTING AND OPERATING
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected
obstacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
The system is designed to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
vehicle's movements.
For limitations of this system, precautions, and
recommendations, see
Ú page 103.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of
these gear selector positions, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to
approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. The system will
become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to
less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h). A display
warning will appear in the instrument cluster display if the
vehicle is in REVERSE and the speed exceeds 7 mph
(11 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The six ParkSense sensors (four when vehicle is not
equipped with front sensors), located in the rear fascia/
bumper, and the six ParkSense sensors located in the
front fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front and behind
the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The
front sensors detect obstacles from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm) from the front
fascia/bumper. The rear sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. These distances
depend on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle in the horizontal direction.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle
is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in the left and/or right front or rear regions
based on the object’s distance and location relative to the
vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region,
the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right
rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the object, the display will show
the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to
continuous.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
STARTING AND OPERATING 101
Front/Rear/Side ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 11 — Continuous Tone if on course for collision/Flashing Arcs
6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 12 — Fast Tone if on course for collision/Flashing Arcs
4
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches (200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None
Single 1/2 Second
Tone
Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than 47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
STARTING AND OPERATING 103
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an
obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and
brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected
within the Uconnect system
Ú page 126.
The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected within the Uconnect system
Ú page 126.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
instrument cluster display
Ú page 63. It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/
bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected
obstacle.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch located below the
Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five
seconds. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE
and the system is disabled, the instrument cluster display
will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
NOTE:
When ParkSense is disabled and the gear selector is
moved to the DRIVE position, no warning message will be
displayed.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and the system requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the
LED will be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT
SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message for five seconds. When the gear
selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster
display will display a "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" pop-up message for five seconds. After five
seconds, a vehicle graphic will be displayed with
"UNAVAILABLE" at either the front or rear sensor location
depending on where the fault is detected. The system will
continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is
functioning properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS",
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED"
messages if an object is detected within the five second
pop-up duration. The vehicle graphic will remain displayed
for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS"
appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the
outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the
ignition. If the message continues to appear see an
authorized dealer.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED"
message appears in the instrument cluster display, see an
authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear fascia/bumper are free
of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the Park-
Sense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
4
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once you
turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition.
When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE posi-
tion and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from
the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in
the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE WIPE REAR
SENSORS” message to be displayed in the instrument
cluster. It may also result is false braking events.
ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in
the open position. An opened liftgate could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
SIDE DISTANCE WARNING SYSTEM
The Side Distance Warning system detects the presence
of side obstacles near the vehicle using the parking
sensors located in the front and rear bumpers.
Side Distance Warning Display
The Side Distance Warning screen will only be displayed if
“Sound and Display” is selected within the Uconnect
system
Ú page 126.
The system warns the driver with an acoustic signal and,
when enabled, with visual indications on the instrument
panel display.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly be
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because
the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than
the rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the contin-
uous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Park-
Sense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver
looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
WARNING ALERTS
Distance
(inches/cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
12 – 24 inches
(30–60 cm)
Arcs-Left 11th Flashing 12th Flashing
Arcs-Right 11th Flashing 12th Flashing
CAUTION!
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
STARTING AND OPERATING 105
(Continued)
NOTE:
Parksense will reduce the volume of the radio if on when
the system is sounding an audible tone. An audible tone
will only sound if a collision is possible.
Activation/Deactivation
The system can operate only after driving a short distance
and if the vehicle speed is between 0 and 7 mph (0 and
11 km/h). The system can be activated/deactivated
within the Uconnect system. If the ParkSense System is
deactivated via the ParkSense switch then the Side
Distance Warning system will automatically be
deactivated.
Message on the display for Side Distance Warning
feature:
“Wipe Sensors” — This message is displayed in the case of
a failure of the Side Distance Warning system sensors.
Free the bumpers of any obstacles, ensure that the front
and rear fascia/bumper are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt
and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
“System Not Available” — This message is displayed if the
Side Distance Warning system is not available. The failed
operation of the system might be due to the insufficient
voltage from the battery or other failures on the electrical
system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the electrical system checked.
ParkSense Usage Precautions
Some conditions may influence the performance of the
Side Distance Warning system:
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear fascia/bumper are free
of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the Park-
Sense system operating properly.
Construction equipment, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of ParkSense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
display will read “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it
on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
The presence of a tow hook without a trailer may inter-
fere with the correct operation of the parking sensors.
Before using the ParkSense system, it is recom-
mended to remove the removable tow hook ball
assembly and any attachments from the vehicle when
it is not used for towing operations.
Audible Alert
Chime
Continuous tone
if vehicle is on
course for a
collision
Fast tone if
vehicle is on
course for a
collision
Radio Volume
Reduced
Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly be
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because
the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than
the rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the contin-
uous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
4
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to
assist the driver during parallel, perpendicular, and
parallel park exit maneuvers by identifying a proper
parking space, providing audible/visual instructions, and
controlling the steering wheel. The ParkSense Active Park
Assist system is defined as “semi-automatic” since the
driver maintains control of the accelerator, gear selector
and brakes. Depending on the driver's parking maneuver
selection, the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a
perpendicular parking space on either side (i.e., driver
side or passenger side), as well as exiting a parallel
parking space.
NOTE:
The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and
must intervene as required during a parking maneuver.
The system is designed to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver
touches the steering wheel after being instructed to
remove their hands from the steering wheel, the
system will cancel, and the driver will be required to
manually complete the parking maneuver.
The system may not work in all conditions (e.g. environ-
mental conditions such as heavy rain, snow, etc., or if
searching for a parking space that has surfaces that
will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
New vehicles from the dealer must have at least
30 miles (48 km) accumulated before the ParkSense
Active Park Assist system is fully calibrated and
performs accurately. This is due to the system’s
dynamic vehicle calibration to improve the perfor-
mance of the feature. The system will also continuously
perform the dynamic vehicle calibration to account for
differences such as over or under inflated tires and
new tires.
ENABLING AND DISABLING THE
P
ARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can
be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
Active Park Assist switch, located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
To enable or disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system, push the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch
once (LED turns on). Pushing the switch a second time will
disable the system (LED turns off).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off
automatically for any of the following conditions:
Parking maneuver is completed
Vehicle speed is greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) when
searching for a parking space
Vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during
active steering guidance into the parking space
Steering wheel is touched during active steering guid-
ance into the parking space
ParkSense switch is pushed
Driver's door is opened
Rear liftgate is opened
Electronic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Braking System
intervention
NOTE:
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system allows a
maximum number of shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE.
If the maneuver cannot be completed within the maximum
amount of shifts, the system will cancel and the
instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to
complete the maneuver manually.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only operate
and search for a parking space when the following
conditions are present:
Gear selector is in DRIVE.
Ignition is in the RUN position.
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated.
Driver's door is closed.
Rear liftgate is closed.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Park-
Sense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using Park-
Sense.
CAUTION!
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
STARTING AND OPERATING 107
Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
Vehicle is not in 4WD Low (if equipped).
The outer surface and the underside of the front and
rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice,
mud, dirt or other obstruction.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED will
turn off if any of the previously described conditions are
not present.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is driven above approximately 15 mph
(25 km/h) while searching for a parking space, the
instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to slow
down. If the vehicle is driven above approximately 18 mph
(30 km/h), the system will cancel. The driver must then
reactivate the system by pushing the ParkSense Active
Park Assist switch.
PARALLEL/PERPENDICULAR PARKING
S
PACE ASSISTANCE OPERATION
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled
the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press or to
Switch Maneuver” message will appear in the instrument
cluster display. You may switch to perpendicular parking
or Parallel Park Exit if you desire. The arrow buttons on the
left side of the steering wheel can be used to switch
parking maneuvers.
Active ParkSense Searching
NOTE:
When searching for a parking space, use the turn
signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you
want to perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense
Active Park Assist system will automatically search for
a parking space on the passenger's side of the vehicle
if the turn signal is not activated.
The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear
of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or
protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tail-
gates, etc. from surrounding objects/vehicles).
When searching for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
The feature will only detect an available parking space
if there is a vehicle parked on each side of the parking
space.
When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular or
parallel parking sequence (depending on the type of
maneuver being performed).
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands from
the steering wheel. When the vehicle comes to a standstill
(your hands still removed from the steering wheel), you will
be instructed to place the gear selector into the REVERSE
position.
4
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 STARTING AND OPERATING
The system may then instruct the driver to wait for steering
to complete before then instructing to check surroundings
and move backward.
Move Backward Into Parallel Parking Space
Move Backward Into Perpendicular Parking Space
The system may instruct several more gear shifts (DRIVE
and REVERSE), with hands off of the steering wheel,
before instructing the driver to check surroundings and
complete the parking maneuver.
When the vehicle is in the parking position, the maneuver
is complete and the driver will be instructed to check the
vehicle's parking position, then shift the vehicle into PARK.
The message “Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking
Position” will be displayed momentarily.
NOTE:
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking
maneuver.
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake and stop
the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings
and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE. If
the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,
the system will cancel and the instrument cluster
display will instruct the driver to complete the
maneuver manually.
The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering
guidance into the parking space. The system will
provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible
for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when performing parallel or
perpendicular parking maneuvers even when using the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system. Always check
carefully behind and in front of your vehicle, look
behind and in front of you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up and moving forward. You
are responsible for safety and must continue to pay
attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a
parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors will
not be detected when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It
is recommended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
STARTING AND OPERATING 109
EXITING THE PARKING SPACE
NOTE:
The function does not work for exiting a perpendicular
parking space, but only exiting parallel parking spaces.
Activation
To activate this function, shift to DRIVE then push the
Active ParkSense switch once. After selection, the system
activates and warns the driver on the instrument panel
display about the operations that have to be carried out to
perform the maneuver correctly.
Selection Of The Maneuver Side
Use the direction indicators to choose the direction that
you want to perform the maneuver. Use the right arrow
indicator to perform the maneuver to the right side and
use the left arrow indicator to perform the maneuver to the
left.
During the maneuver, the system instructs the driver to
shift to REVERSE, and operate the turn signal in the
direction you want to exit. Let go of the steering wheel and
use the brake or accelerator pedals as instructed, while
the system handles the steering automatically for exiting
the parking space. If the driver continues to carry out a
voluntary or involuntary action on the steering wheel
during the exit maneuver (touching or holding the steering
wheel to prevent its movement), the maneuver will be
interrupted.
Shift To Reverse Then Move Backward
Shift To Drive Then Move Forward
End Of Maneuver
The semi-automatic maneuver ends when the display
shows the message of a completed maneuver. At the end
of the maneuver, the system gives back the vehicle control
to the driver.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LANESENSE OPERATION
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The
LaneSense system uses a forward facing camera to detect
lane markings and measure vehicle position within the
lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
drifts out of the lane (no turn signal applied), the
LaneSense system provides a haptic warning in the form
of torque applied to the steering wheel, as well as a visual
warning in the instrument cluster display, to prompt the
driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying force to the steering wheel at any time.
4
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 STARTING AND OPERATING
When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver
drifts across the lane marking (no turn signal applied), the
LaneSense system provides a visual warning through the
instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to remain
within the lane.
When only a single lane marking is detected, a haptic or a
torque warning will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the Lane-
Sense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are on the
steering wheel and provide an audible and visual warning
to the driver if removed. The system will cancel if the driver
does not return their hands to the wheel.
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF
The LaneSense button is located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the LaneSense
button (LED turns off). A “LaneSense On” message is
shown in the instrument cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense
button once (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last system state, on
or off, from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the instrument cluster display.
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense telltale is solid white.
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale)
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense tell-
tale is solid white when only the left lane marking
has been detected and the system is ready to provide
visual warnings in the instrument cluster display if an
unintentional lane departure occurs.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left lane line flashes from white to gray and the Lane-
Sense telltale changes from solid white to flashing
yellow.
Lane Approached
(Flashing White To Gray Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for
a right lane departure when only the right lane marking
has been detected.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
STARTING AND OPERATING 111
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale
is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is ready to provide visual
warnings in the instrument cluster display and a torque
warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane
departure occurs.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale)
When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situa-
tion, the left lane line turns solid white. The LaneSense
telltale changes from solid green to solid yellow. At
this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed (Solid White Line/Solid Yellow Telltale)
When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left lane line flashes from white to gray and the Lane-
Sense telltale changes from solid yellow to flashing
yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering
wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached
(Flashing White To Gray Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for
a right lane departure.
4
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
CHANGING LANESENSE SETTINGS
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity
of the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity
(early/late) that you can configure through the Uconnect
system
Ú page 126.
NOTE:
When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
The warnings are disabled with use of the turn signal.
The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
whenever a safety system engages (Anti-Lock Brakes,
Traction Control System, Electronic Stability Control,
Forward Collision Warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the
rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed
in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to
“Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of the screen.
After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView
camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear
license plate.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable
modes of operation that may be selected through the
Uconnect system
Ú page 126.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera
delay turned off, the rear camera mode is exited and the
previous screen appears. When the vehicle is shifted out
of REVERSE with camera delay turned on, the camera
image will continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds
unless the following conditions occur: the vehicle speed
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into
PARK, the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF position,
or the touchscreen X button to disable the display of the
Rear View Camera is pressed.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera
1. Press the Controls button located on the bottom of
the Uconnect display.
2. Press the Back Up Camera button to turn the Rear
View Camera system on.
NOTE:
If the Rear View Camera was manually activated, the timer
will start again only after the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h),
the Rear View Camera image will be displayed continu-
ously until deactivated via the touchscreen X button,
the vehicle is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed
in the OFF position.
The touchscreen X button to disable display of the
camera image is made available ONLY when the
vehicle is not in REVERSE.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected back
up path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed
center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of The
Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or
greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
STARTING AND OPERATING 113
(Continued)
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry
with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors inside the pipe
seal the system.
1. Open the fuel filler door by pushing on the rear edge
of the fuel door.
Fuel Door
2. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe; the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while
refueling.
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel, and when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
Fuel Filler
4. Keep the nozzle in the filler for five seconds after
nozzle clicks to allow fuel to drain from the nozzle.
5. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification
label affixed to the driver's side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), front and rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Total load must be
limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not
exceeded.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that
the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in
violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
WARNING!
4
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 STARTING AND OPERATING
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles, or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability, do not necessarily increase the
vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial
scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then
be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing
the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or
rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within
the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from
front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your
vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo, and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR
Ú page 113.
WARNING!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or
the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts on
your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your
vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose control.
Overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
STARTING AND OPERATING 115
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables, and equipment (permanent or
temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its “loaded and
ready for operation” condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully
loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the
trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle and
trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading”
Ú page 113 for
further information.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by
the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load on
your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
The electronic TSC (if equipped) recognizes a swaying
trailer and automatically applies individual wheel brakes
and/or reduces engine power to attempt to eliminate the
trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are commonly used to tow small and medium
sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically
used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to
the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight-distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
If the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
or more, it is mandatory to use a weight-distributing
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you
use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control
of the vehicle and have a collision.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
Weight-distributing hitch systems may not be
compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult with
your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable
Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional informa-
tion.
4
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow, and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer
hitch for your intended towing condition.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,722 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Engine/Transmission Model Frontal Area Maximum GTW Maximum TW (See Note)
2.0L Automatic FWD or 4WD 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 2,000 lb (907 kg) 200 lb (90 kg)
2.0L Automatic With Trailer Tow
Package
4WD 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 4,000 lb (1,814 kg) 400 lb (181 kg)
2.4L Automatic With Or Without
Trailer Tow Package
FWD or 4WD 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 2,000 lb (907 kg) 200 lb (90 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire And Loading Infor-
mation Placard.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
STARTING AND OPERATING 117
(Continued)
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your fascia/bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds
to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the Tire And Loading Information Placard for the
maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for
your vehicle
Ú page 238.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended:
WARNING!
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in the front
of the trailer. This places 10% of the GTW on the tow
hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or
heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway
severely side to side which will cause loss of control of
the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in
front is the cause of many trailer collisions.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that it will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance, or damage to
brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspen-
sion, chassis structure, or tires.
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross
the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. Always block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized.
WARNING!
4
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing
while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer use.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will
not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.
Refer to Tires for further information
Ú page 235.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do
not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu-
ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lb (907 kg).
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect the trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
(or any other device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
connectors) before launching a boat into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the
engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an acci-
dent.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front of you. Failure to do so could result in an acci-
dent.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
STARTING AND OPERATING 119
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and backing up
the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE (D) range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, use the AutoStick shift
control to select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy
loading conditions will improve performance and extend
transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
build up. This action will also provide better engine
braking.
AutoStick — If Equipped
When using the AutoStick shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or
“3” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as neces-
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
4
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
4X4 Models
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Models
1-Speed Power Transfer
Unit
2-Speed Power Transfer Unit
Flat Tow NONE
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions:
Transmission in
PARK
Power transfer unit in
N (NEUTRAL)
Tow in
forward direction
Dolly Tow
Front OK
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK OK
NOTE:
You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature is
enabled or disabled via the customer programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
STARTING AND OPERATING 121
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
F
RONT-WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) MODELS
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will
result.
Recreational towing (for front-wheel drive models) is
allowed ONLY if the front wheels are
OFF the ground. This
may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If
using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the parking brake. Place transmission in PARK.
Turn the engine off.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
5. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but do not
start the engine.
6. Press and hold the brake pedal.
7. Release the parking brake.
8. Turn the ignition OFF, remove the key fob, and
release the brake pedal.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — 4X4
M
ODELS WITH 1-SPEED POWER
T
RANSFER UNIT
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do not
have a N (NEUTRAL) position in the power transfer unit.
NOTE:
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer
provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — 4X4
M
ODELS WITH 2-SPEED POWER
T
RANSFER UNIT
The power transfer unit must be shifted into N (NEUTRAL)
and the transmission must be in PARK for recreational
towing. The N (NEUTRAL) selection button is adjacent to
the 4WD selector switch. Shifts into and out of N
(NEUTRAL) can take place with the selector switch in any
mode position.
CAUTION!
Towing with the front wheels on the ground will cause
severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with
ANY of its wheels on the ground
can cause severe transmission and/or power transfer
unit damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT dolly tow any 4x4 vehicle. Towing with only
one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear) will
cause severe transmission and/or power transfer
unit damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the
ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this vehicle
backwards can cause severe damage to the power
transfer unit.
The transmission must be in PARK for recreational
towing.
Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting into N (NEUTRAL)” to be
certain that the power transfer unit is fully in N
(NEUTRAL). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the previous
requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
power transfer unit damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on
your vehicle. The fascia/bumper face bar will be
damaged.
4
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Into N (NEUTRAL)
Use the following procedure to shift the 4WD system into
N (NEUTRAL).
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level ground,
and shift the transmission to PARK.
2. Turn the engine off.
3. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, but do not
start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold
the recessed N (NEUTRAL) button (located by the
selector switch) for four seconds. The light behind the
N symbol will blink, indicating shift in progress. The
light will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to
N (NEUTRAL) is complete.
Neutral Button
7. After the shift is completed and the N (NEUTRAL) light
stays on, release the N (NEUTRAL) button.
8. Start the engine.
9. Release the parking brake.
10. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
11. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
12. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
13. Apply the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine off,
and remove the key fob.
15. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
16. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, but do not
start the engine.
17. Press and hold the brake pedal.
18. Release the parking brake.
19. Turn the ignition OFF, remove the key fob, and
release the brake pedal.
NOTE:
When towing this vehicle behind another vehicle, the
parking brake must be released.
Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
before pushing the N (NEUTRAL) button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements are not met before
pushing the N (NEUTRAL) button or are no longer met
during the shift, then the N (NEUTRAL) indicator light
will flash continuously until all requirements are met or
until the N (NEUTRAL) button is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position for a shift
to take place and for the position indicator lights to be
operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN position,
the shift will not take place and no position indicator
lights will be on or flashing.
A flashing N (NEUTRAL) position indicator light indi-
cates that shift requirements have not been met.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit in the N
(NEUTRAL) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The N (NEUTRAL) position disengages
both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain
and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
unless the vehicle is otherwise secured (for example,
when attached to the tow vehicle).
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the power transfer unit is fully in N (NEUTRAL) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
STARTING AND OPERATING 123
Shifting Out Of N (NEUTRAL)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal use.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it
connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, but do not
start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold
the recessed power transfer unit N (NEUTRAL) button
(located by the selector switch) for one second.
Neutral Button
7. When the N (NEUTRAL) indicator light turns off,
release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
8. After the N (NEUTRAL) button has been released, the
power transfer unit will shift to the position indicated
by the selector switch.
NOTE:
When shifting the power transfer unit out of N (NEUTRAL),
the engine should remain off to avoid gear clash.
9. Shift the transmission into PARK.
10. Release the brake pedal.
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
12. Start the engine.
13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
14. Release the parking brake.
15. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
16. Re-enable the Auto Park Brake feature, if desired.
NOTE:
Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
before pushing the N (NEUTRAL) button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements are not met before
pushing the N (NEUTRAL) button or are no longer met
during the shift, the N (NEUTRAL) indicator light will
flash continuously until all requirements are met or
until the N (NEUTRAL) button is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position for a shift
to take place and for the position indicator lights to be
operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN position,
the shift will not take place and no position indicator
lights will be on or flashing.
A flashing N (NEUTRAL) position indicator light indi-
cates that shift requirements have not been met.
DRIVING TIPS
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
conventional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
Utility vehicles are not designed for cornering at the same
speeds as conventional passenger cars any more than
sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control
or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
When To Use 4WD LOW Range
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional
traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain,
ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase
low-speed pulling power (refer to “All Wheel Drive and
Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in this section for further
details). This range should be limited to extreme situations
such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional low
speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess
of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in 4WD
LOW range.
4
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 STARTING AND OPERATING
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water,
there are a number of precautions that must be
considered before entering the water:
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must
drive through water, try to determine the depth and the
bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to
entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water
to minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off)
avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the
flow rate is reduced. If you must cross flowing-water, avoid
depths in excess of 9 inches (22 cm). The flowing water
can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into
deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are
downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 16 inches
(40.5 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize
wave effects. Maximum speed in 16 inches (40.5 cm) of
water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
(Trailhawk only): Avoid driving in standing water deeper
than 19 inches (48 cm), and reduce speed appropriately
to minimize wave effects. Maximum speed in 19 inches
(48 cm) of water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine, transmission, Power
Transfer Unit, and Rear Drive Module) to ensure they have
not been contaminated. Contaminated fluids and
lubricants (milky, foamy in appearance) should be
flushed/changed as soon as possible to prevent
component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the 4WD system to the appropriate terrain
mode, using 4WD LOW if necessary
Ú page 85. Only shift
into a lower gear to maintain forward motion. Over-revving
the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads because
engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE:
Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the conditions
at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the 4WD system to 4WD LOW. Use
FIRST gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.
NOTE:
Brakes should be applied at increased slippage, but
before coming to a stop to avoid digging into the loose
surface and rendering the operator of the vehicle stuck/
immobile.
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep
hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately
apply the brakes. Once stopped, shift to REVERSE. Back
slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of
the engine to help regulate your speed. If the brakes are
required to control vehicle speed, apply them lightly and
avoid locking or skidding the tires.
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering as
a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving
through water may cause damage that may not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make
it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt to
turn around. To do so may result in tipping and rolling
the vehicle. Always back straight down a hill in
REVERSE gear carefully. Never back down a hill in
NEUTRAL using only the brake.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
STARTING AND OPERATING 125
NOTE:
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill — drive
straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a
hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by
turning the front wheels slowly left and right. This may
provide a fresh “bite” into the surface and may provide
traction to complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear and the 4WD system
to 4WD LOW range or Select Hill Descent Control (if
equipped)
Ú page 143. Let the vehicle go slowly down the
hill with all four wheels turning against engine
compression drag. This will permit you to control the
vehicle speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission
whenever possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is always
a good idea to check for damage.
Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly
on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and
suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to
the values specified in the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
and cleaned as soon as possible.
Impacted material can cause wheel imbalance.
Freeing the wheels of impacted material will likely
rectify imbalance condition.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the braking system may
cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking
performance. Full braking power may not be available
to prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, inspect and clean the
braking components as soon as possible.
4
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
With 8.4-inch Display system, refer to your Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only
and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Depending on applicability, your vehicle may be able to
send or receive information from a wired or wireless
network. This information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and
takes appropriate steps as needed. As always, if you
experience unusual behavior, contact an authorized
dealer immediately,
Ú page 258, or refer to your
Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual for additional contact
information.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
NOTE:
To help further improve user experience, features,
stability, etc., and minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should routinely check
www.driveuconnect.com (US Residents) or www.driveuco-
nnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn about available
Uconnect software updates.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel. These buttons allow
you to access and change the Customer Programmable
Features. Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or beside
the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument
panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/ENTER control knob
located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings. Push the center of
the control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF and
MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn off
the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap the
screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or
certain option on the Uconnect system.
WARNING!
ONLY insert trusted devices/components into your
vehicle. Media of unknown origin could possibly
contain malicious software, and if installed in your
vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
immediately.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
MULTIMEDIA 127
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Buttons On The
Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen
For the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
Press the Apps button, then press the Settings button
on the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In
this mode, the Uconnect system allows you to access
programmable features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
All settings should be changed with the ignition in the
ON/RUN position.
When making a selection, only press one button at a time
to enter the desired menu. Once in the desired menu,
press and release the preferred setting option until a
check mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete,
press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on
the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the available settings.
Language
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system will display in the chosen
language. The available setting is:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and the Instrument Cluster
Display. The available languages are English, Français, and Español.
5
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 MULTIMEDIA
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the touchscreen. The available
settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set it
automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust the display
brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the
display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness;
the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness;
the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Keyboard
This setting will change the keyboard type on the display. The selectable keyboards are
“ABCDEF Keyboard”, “QWERTY Keyboard”, and “AZERTY Keyboard”.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Control Screen Timeout
This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after five
seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster This setting will display Navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster
Display.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
MULTIMEDIA 129
Units
Voice
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will display in the instrument cluster
display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
Custom
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel
Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), or
“Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement independently.
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Response Length
This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition system. The “Brief”
setting provides a shortened audio description from the system. The “Detailed” setting
provides the full audio description from the system.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will
always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show the Command List and
provide a brief description of what the command does. The “Never” setting will turn the
Command List off.
5
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 MULTIMEDIA
Clock
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync With GPS Time
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will control
the time via the GPS location.
Time Format
This setting will allow you set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be off
for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour format.
The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Set Time Hours
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting
to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours. The “-” setting will decrease the
hours.
Set Time Minutes
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this
setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The “-” setting will
decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Set Date
This setting will allow you to set the day, month and year. Using “+” or “-”, you can scroll
through the available days, months, and years.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
MULTIMEDIA 131
Safety/Driving Assistance
When the Safety/Driving Assistance button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These options will differ depending
on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options
related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) alert
sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is in view,
and the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW system
signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system
signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning
This setting will turn the Forward Collision system on or off. The “Off” setting will
deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible chime
when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide an
audible chime and apply brake pressure when a collision is detected.
LaneSense Warning
This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will provide lane
departure feedback. The available settings are “Early”, “Medium”, and “Late”.
LaneSense Strength
This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback during a lane
departure. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected and
can provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings are
“Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings are
“Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist
This setting will provide braking assist if the Rear ParkSense system senses a collision
with an object.
5
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 MULTIMEDIA
Brakes
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in a
vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting will
activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting
will activate both the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of
REVERSE.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines on or off.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Side Distance Warning
This setting will turn the Side Distance Warning on or off and set how the system will
communicate with the user. The “Off” setting will deactivate the system. The “Sound”
setting will provide an audible chime to the user. The “Sound And Display” setting will
provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
Side Distance Warning Volume
This setting will adjust the warning for side distance. The available options are “Low”,
“Medium”, and “High”.
Tire Fill Assist This setting will turn the Tire Fill Assist on or off.
Setting Name Description
When the Brakes button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to the vehicle’s brake system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service
This setting will allow you to set the brakes for service. When the setting is selected, a
pop-up will display with “Yes” and “No” options.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
MULTIMEDIA 133
Lights
Doors & Locks
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle purchase.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off
after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and
“90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off
after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and
“90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed
on the key fob on or off. Available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Door Locks
This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when the vehicle
reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
5
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 MULTIMEDIA
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed
on the key fob on or off. Available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The “Off”
setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press” setting
will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will
sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
Remote Door Unlock
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are needed
to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver door on the
first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will unlock all doors on the first
push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) on or
off.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob
This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have been linked
to the key fob.
Power Liftgate Alert
This setting will chime an audible alert when the power liftgate is raising or lowering.
Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Hands Free Power Liftgate
This setting will use hands-free technology to automatically open or close the power
liftgate. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Setting Name Description
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
MULTIMEDIA 135
Auto-On Comfort
Engine Off Options
When the Auto-On Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start has been activated or the
vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting
will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the
comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort
systems whenever the vehicle is started.
When the Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shut off. These settings will only activate when the ignition is set
to OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Engine Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are
“0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
vehicle has been turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and
“90 sec”.
5
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio location within the
vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/right
of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adj Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the volume
will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”,
and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port. The
available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Loudness This setting will improve audio quality at lower volumes.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
MULTIMEDIA 137
Phone/Bluetooth®
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or smartphone.
The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Do Not Disturb
This setting will open the Do Not Disturb settings menu. The following settings are “Auto
Reply” (both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default), and “Custom Auto Reply
Message” (create message).
Paired Phones This setting will show the list of paired phones.
Paired Audio Sources This setting will show the list of paired audio sources.
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used to skip specific radio
channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tune Start
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music
channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will display of
the skipped channels.
Subscription Information
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Travel Link is a
separate subscription.
5
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 MULTIMEDIA
Camera — If Equipped
Mirrors & Wipers — If Equipped
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of
REVERSE.
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines on or off.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines on or off.
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse
This setting will tilt the outside side-view mirrors when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will
move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights with Wipers
This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated. Setting options are
“On” and “Off”.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
MULTIMEDIA 139
System Information
Clear Personal Data/Restore Settings
When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software Licenses This will display the software licensing information screen.
When the Clear Personal Data/Restore Settings button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default
settings. These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Restore Settings This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
Reset App Drawer This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data from
the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
5
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 MULTIMEDIA
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock
positions.
Remote Sound System Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
button in the center and controls the volume and mode of
the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will
increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker
switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the right-hand control’s center button will make
the radio switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left-hand control
is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode:
RADIO OPERATION
Pushing the top of the switch will seek up for the next
available station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
seek down for the next available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have
programmed in the radio preset button.
MEDIA MODE
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next track
on the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®). Pushing
the bottom of the switch once goes to the beginning of the
current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it
is within eight seconds after the current track begins to
play.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by repositioning the mobile phone within the vehicle. This
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio
performance does not satisfactorily improve from
repositioning the mobile phone, it is recommended that
the volume be turned down or off during mobile phone
operation when not using the Uconnect system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or further from
the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and
recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the
scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy
emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones.
However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in
some situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the
wireless radio
Ú page 262.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
MULTIMEDIA 141
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with Off-Road Pages, which
displays vehicle information related to the drivetrain,
transfer case, and coolant/oil gauges.
To access Off-Road Pages, press the Apps button on the
touchscreen, and then select “Off-Road Pages”.
Main Menu
Off-Road Pages has the following selectable pages:
Vehicle Dynamics
Pitch & Roll — If Equipped
Accessory Gauge
OFF-ROAD PAGES STATUS BAR
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along the bottom
of Off-Road Pages and is present in each of the selectable
page options. It provides continually updating information
for the following items:
1. Current Transfer Case Status (only appears when in
4WD Low)
2. Current Latitude/Longitude
3. Current Altitude of the vehicle
4. Status of Hill Descent
DRIVETRAIN
The Drivetrain page displays information concerning the
vehicle’s drivetrain.
The following information is displayed:
1. Steering angle in degrees
2. Status of the Front Drivetrain
3. Power Transfer Unit
Drivetrain
1 — Uconnect Apps Button
2 — Off-Road Pages App
1 — Steering Angle
2 — Front Drivetrain
3 — Power Transfer Unit
5
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 MULTIMEDIA
PITCH & ROLL
The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s current pitch
(angle up and down) and roll (angle side to side) in
degrees. The Pitch & Roll gauges provide a visualization of
the current vehicle angle.
Pitch & Roll Menu
ACCESSORY GAUGES
The Accessory Gauges page displays the current status of
the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil Temperature,
Transmission Temperature, and Battery Voltage.
Accessory Gauges Menu
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED
The Selec-Terrain page displays the current Selec-Terrain
mode through a high resolution image. The vehicle must
be in the ON/RUN position to display Selec-Terrain
information.
The selectable modes are as follows:
Auto — Default
Snow
Sand
Mud
Rock — Vehicle Must Be In 4WD Low
NOTE:
While in the Selec-Terrain pages, the Off-Road Pages
Status Bar will also display the current Selec-Terrain
mode.
Current Selec-Terrain Mode
1 — Current Pitch
2 — Current Roll
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
143
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions. The system
automatically prevents wheel lock and enhances vehicle
control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the system
detects one or more wheels are beginning to lock. Road
conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad
tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates:
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may continue
to hear for a short time after the stop).
Brake pedal pulsations.
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may
result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long
as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while
driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and that service is required.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should be
serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of
Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced EBC system.
This system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Traction Control
System (TCS). These systems work together to enhance
both vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio transmit-
ting equipment. This interference can cause possible
loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
6
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 SAFETY
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Dynamic Steering
Torque (DST), Hill Descent Control (HDC), Rain Brake
Support (RBS), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Selec-Speed
Control (SSC), and Trailer Sway Control (TSC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing
the rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit
of the system, you must apply continuous braking
pressure during the stopping sequence (do not “pump”
the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is
released, the BAS is deactivated.
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the Brake System Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
DST is a feature of the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
and the Electric Power Steering (EPS) modules, that
provides torque at the steering wheel for certain driving
conditions, in which the ESC module is detecting vehicle
instability. The torque that the steering wheel receives is
only meant to help the driver realize optimal steering
behavior in order to reach/maintain vehicle stability. The
only notification the driver receives that the feature is
active is the torque applied to the steering wheel.
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the driver realize the
correct course of action through small torques on the
steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of the DST
feature is highly dependent on the driver’s sensitivity and
overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very important
to realize that this feature will not steer the vehicle,
meaning the driver is still responsible for steering the
vehicle.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of
the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent
the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring
the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed of the
vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change of
the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off” mode (if
equipped) Ú page 145.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the natu-
ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase the traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
tions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a
BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user's safety or the safety of others.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel
lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel
lift or rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the
roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The capa-
bilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
SAFETY 145
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of the
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for
oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying
the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract these
conditions. Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer
or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located in
the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the ESC
system becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is active. If the
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC
system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever the
vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode. This
mode should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for
activation, which allows for more wheel spin than normally
allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the ESC
OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate.
To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF
button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the push and
release of the button will toggle the ESC modes. Multiple
attempts may be required to return to “ESC On”.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabil-
ities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain
your vehicle, may change the handling characteris-
tics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the
performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn
tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance that
reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section) has been disabled and the ESC OFF
Indicator Light will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of
TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
6
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 SAFETY
(Continued)
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only
and should not be used on any public roadways. In this
mode, TCS and ESC features are turned off. To enter the
“Full Off” mode, push and hold the ESC OFF button for five
seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine
running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the ESC
OFF Indicator Light will illuminate, and the ESC OFF
message will display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC
on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF button.
NOTE:
System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial Off”
mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed.
When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined
speed the system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes (if
equipped).
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
in the instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode. It
should turn off with the engine running. If the
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light starts to
flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system
becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light also flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates that the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is in a reduced
mode.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and the
ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON position, the
ESC system will be on even if it was turned off previ-
ously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off-road driving while in
4WD Low. HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending
hills during various driving situations. HDC controls vehicle
speed by actively controlling the brakes.
HDC Has Three States:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed).
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque reduc-
tion and stability features are disabled. Therefore,
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system
is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver,
the ESC system will not engage to assist in main-
taining stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for
off-highway or off-road use only.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
WARNING!
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
SAFETY 147
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC button, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
The driveline is in 4WD Low
The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h)
The parking brake is released
The driver door is closed
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if driven
down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set speed for
HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by
using the gear shift +/-. The following summarizes the
HDC set speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not acti-
vate.
R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC target
speed selection, but will not affect the gear chosen by the
transmission. When actively controlling HDC the trans-
mission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set
speed and corresponding driving conditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or
brake application at any time.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur:
Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake
application.
Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
below 40 mph (64 km/h).
Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magni-
tude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the HDC button.
The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
The parking brake is applied.
The driver door opens.
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h)
for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)
(HDC exits immediately).
HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC
button has an LED icon, which offers feedback to the
driver about the state HDC is in.
The cluster icon and button light will illuminate and
remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This
is the normal operating condition for HDC.
The cluster icon and button light will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the
HDC button but enable conditions are not met.
The cluster icon and button light will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when HDC disables due to
excess speed.
The cluster icon and button light will flash when HDC
deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will
stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have
cooled sufficiently.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must
remain attentive to the driving conditions and is
responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
6
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 SAFETY
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete stop
while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake while
stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake
pressure for a short period. If the driver does not apply the
throttle before this time expires, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as
normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
PARK or NEUTRAL.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster display
Ú page 63
If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings
Ú page 126
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while
towing a trailer.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet conditions.
It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure
to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors. It
functions when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI
speed. When RBS is active, there is no notification to the
driver and no driver interaction is required.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such
as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while pull-
ing a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and
objects, and most importantly brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road con-
ditions. Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision
or serious personal injury.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the
trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In
order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming
acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or
apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing
the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, be certain
to place the transmission in PARK (P).
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a colli-
sion or serious personal injury.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
SAFETY 149
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full braking
during emergency braking situations. It anticipates when
an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring
how fast the throttle is released by the driver. The
Electronic Brake Controller (EBC) will prepare the brake
system for a panic stop.
Selec-Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
SSC is intended for off-road driving in 4WD Low only. SSC
maintains vehicle speed by actively controlling engine
torque and brakes.
SSC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed).
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC button, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable SSC:
The driveline is in 4WD Low
The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h)
The parking brake is released
The driver door is closed
The driver is not applying throttle
Activating SSC
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once the
following conditions are met:
Driver releases throttle
Driver releases brake
Transmission is in any selection other than PARK (P)
Vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h)
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver, and can
be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. Additionally, the
SSC set speed may be reduced when climbing a grade and
the level of set speed reduction depends on the
magnitude of grade. The following summarizes the SSC
set speeds:
SSC Target Set Speeds
1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)
NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
NOTE:
During SSC the +/- shifter input is used for SSC target
speed selection but will not affect the gear chosen by
the transmission. While actively controlling SSC the
transmission will shift appropriately for the
driver-selected set speed and corresponding driving
conditions.
SSC performance is influenced by the Selec-Terrain
mode. This difference may be notable to the driver and
may be perceived as a varying level of aggressiveness.
Driver Override:
The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or
brake application at any time.
Deactivating SSC
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur:
Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or brake
application.
Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
below 40 mph (64 km/h).
Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
6
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 SAFETY
Disabling SSC
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the following
conditions occur:
The driver pushes the SSC button.
The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
The parking brake is applied.
The driver door opens.
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h)
for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)
(SSC exits immediately).
Feedback To The Driver:
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC
button has an LED which offers feedback to the driver
about the state SSC is in.
The cluster icon and button lamp will illuminate and
remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated. This
is the normal operating condition for SSC.
The cluster icon and button lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the
SSC button but enable conditions are not met.
The cluster icon and button lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when SSC disables due to
excess speed.
The cluster icon and button lamp will flash then extin-
guish when SSC deactivates due to overheated brakes.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the
driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may apply
brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce
engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD) functions similarly to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will
allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that
is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS and
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) are in reduced modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use
caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue
weight recommendations
Ú page 114.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light will flash, the engine power may be reduced
and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual
wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” or
“Full Off” modes.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
I
F EQUIPPED
BSM uses two radar sensors, located inside the rear
fascia/bumper, to detect highway licensable vehicles
(automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the
blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when driving in off road conditions. The
driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions
and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer
load to eliminate trailer sway.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
SAFETY 151
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors to
let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear and enters standby mode when the vehicle is
in PARK (P).
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.7 m). The zone
length starts at the outside mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper
of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection
zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed
reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will
alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
detection zones.
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify
the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and
trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM Warning Light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear
Ú page 126.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may experi-
ence dropouts (blinking on and off) of the side mirror
warning indicator lamps when a motorcycle or any
small object remains at the side of the vehicle for
extended periods of time (more than a couple of
seconds).
The area on the rear fascia/bumper where the radar
sensors are located must remain free of snow, ice, and
dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system can
function properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia/
bumper where the radar sensors are located with foreign
objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
Sensor Location
The BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object.
If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to
an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and
detected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
muted.
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see
if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
6
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 SAFETY
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between
the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the
warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes
Ú page 262.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help
detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system
is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or
animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance
over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
SAFETY 153
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out of
parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the
parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed.
The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross
traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the
driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE (R), the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms,
including reducing the radio volume.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors
are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will
not be able to alert the driver.
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of operation that
are available in the Uconnect system
Ú page 126.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system
will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object.
If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to
an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and
detected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode
when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect
an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
6
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 SAFETY
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with audible
warnings, visual warnings (within the instrument cluster
display), and may apply a haptic warning to warn the driver
when it detects a potential frontal collision. The warnings
are intended to provide the driver with enough time to
react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC), to
calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the
system determines that a forward collision is probable, the
driver will be provided with audible and visual warnings
and may provide a haptic warning in the form of a brake
jerk.
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver reacts
to the warnings by braking and the system determines
that the driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but
has not applied sufficient brake force, the system will
compensate and provide additional brake force as
required.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event begins
at a speed below 32 mph (52 km/h), the system may
provide the maximum braking possible to mitigate the
potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision
Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle
completely, the system will hold the vehicle at standstill for
two seconds and then release the brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
will be deactivated
Ú page 262.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW will
be deactivated until the next key cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the
vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be
deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as over-
head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rate of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
Turning FCW On Or Off
The FCW button is located in the Uconnect display in the
control settings
Ú page 126.
To turn the FCW system on, press the forward collision
button once.
To turn the FCW system off, press the forward collision
button once.
NOTE:
When the FCW is “on”, this allows the system to warn
the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front.
When the FCW is “off”, this prevents the system from
warning the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front. If the FCW is set to “off”, “FCW OFF" will
be displayed in the instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
SAFETY 155
When FCW status is set to “Only Warning”, this
prevents the system from providing limited active
braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not
braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal
collision.
When FCW status is set to “Warning and Braking”, this
allows the system to warn the driver of a possible colli-
sion with the vehicle in front using audible/visual warn-
ings and it applies autonomous braking.
The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shutdown.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú
page 126.
Far
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the “Far”
setting and the system status is “Only Warning”,
this allows the system to warn the driver of a
possible more distant collision with the vehicle in
front using audible/visual warnings.
More cautious drivers that do not mind frequent
warnings may prefer this setting.
NOTE:
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of FCW
possible collision warnings experienced.
Medium
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the “Medium”
setting and the system status is “Only Warning”,
this allows the system to warn the driver of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front using
audible/visual warnings.
Near
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the “Near”
setting and the system status is “Only Warning”,
this allows the system to warn the driver of a
possible closer collision with the vehicle in front
using audible/visual warnings.
This setting provides less reaction time than the
“Far” and “Medium” settings, which allows for a
more dynamic driving experience.
More dynamic or aggressive drivers that want to
avoid frequent warnings may prefer this setting.
NOTE:
The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of FCW
possible collision warnings experienced.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster display reads “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition
that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, the active braking may
not be fully available. Once the condition that limited the
system performance is no longer present, the system will
return to its full performance state. If the problem persists,
see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display
reads:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still driveable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based
on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature decreases, the
tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be
set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded
into the tire sidewall. The tire pressure will also increase
as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and there should be
no adjustment for this increased pressure.
See
Ú page 235 on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s
tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
6
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 SAFETY
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light)
illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the
TPMS Warning Light to turn off.
The system will automatically update and the TPMS
Warning Light will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of
33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi
(193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi
(165 kPa). This tire pressure is low enough to turn on the
TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the
TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
pressure value
Ú page 262.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be
increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
TPMS Warning Light off.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinfla-
tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pres-
sure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pres-
sure in the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver module
Four TPMS sensors
Various TPMS messages, which display in the instru-
ment cluster
TPMS Warning Light
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
The TPMS sensor is not designed for use on after-
market wheels, and may contribute to a poor overall
system performance. Customers are encouraged to
use Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) wheels
to ensure TPMS feature operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function
checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the TPMS sensor.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
SAFETY 157
SERVICE TPMS WARNING
When a system fault is detected, the TPMS Warning Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition,
the instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to
indicate which sensor is not being received.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Service Warning
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the TPMS Warning Light will no longer flash,
and the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will no longer
display, and a pressure value will display in place of the
dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
affects radio wave signals.
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel hous-
ings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare Or Non-Matching Full Size
Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size
does not have a TPMS sensor. Therefore, the TPMS
will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare
tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure
below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next
ignition key cycle, the TPMS Warning Light will remain
on and a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in
the instrument cluster will still display a different
color pressure value and an "Inflate to XX" message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning Light will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
In addition, the instrument cluster will display a
“Service Tire Pressure System” message for five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the
instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact
spare or non-matching full size, the TPMS will update
automatically. In addition, the TPMS Warning Light
will turn off and the graphic in the instrument cluster
will display a new pressure value instead of dashes
(- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING LOW PRESSURE
WARNINGS
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound
when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a "Tire Low" message for a
minimum of five seconds, an "Inflate to XX" message and
a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the
low tire pressure values in a different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low Pressure Warning
6
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 SAFETY
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a different color
in the instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in the
"Inflate to XX" message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the
instrument cluster will return to their original color, and the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be
increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
TPMS Warning Light off.
TIRE FILL ALERT
Tire Fill Alert notifies the user when the placard tire
pressure is attained while inflating or deflating the tire.
The customer may choose to disable or enable the Tire Fill
Alert feature through use of the customer settings in the
radio.
NOTE:
Only one tire can be filled at a time when using the Tire
Fill Alert system.
The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if an
existing TPMS fault is set to “active” or if the system is
in deactivation mode (if equipped).
The system will be activated when the system detects an
increase of tire pressure while inflating the tire. The
ignition must be in the RUN mode, with the transmission
in PARK (P).
NOTE:
It is not required to have the engine running to enter Tire
Fill Alert mode.
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the vehicle is in
Tire Fill Alert mode.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire pressure
display screen will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
Operation:
The horn will chirp once to let the user know when to
stop filling the tire, when it reaches recommended
pressure.
The horn will chirp three times if the tire is over filled
and will continue to chirp every five seconds if the user
continues to inflate the tire.
The horn will chirp once again when enough air is let
out to reach proper inflation level.
The horn will also chirp three times if the tire is then
under-inflated and will continue to chirp every five
seconds if the user continues to deflate the tire.
If the hazard lamps do not come on while inflating the
tire, the TPMS sensor may be in an inoperative posi-
tion, preventing the TPMS sensor signal from being
received. In this case, the vehicle may need to be
moved slightly forward or backward.
TPMS DEACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire
assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors, such as when
installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your
vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with
TPMS sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on. The instrument cluster will display the
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then display
dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no
longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will
remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
turn off. The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message and then display pressure values
in place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle the
"SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer be
displayed as long as no system fault exists.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
SAFETY 159
(Continued)
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may
be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an
authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly must be secured in the appropriate child
restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position
Ú page 176.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint Ú page 176.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front air
bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants could be
injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, see
Ú page 258 for customer service contact
information.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from
the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection
and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is
in the START or ON/RUN position.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
6
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 SAFETY
(Continued)
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a
few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START
or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are
buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when an outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is
unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence
starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and
sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert
warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The
BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle
speed until the driver and occupied outboard front seat
passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should
instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized
dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating
BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/
shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you
under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat
belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of
the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some colli-
sions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or
not an air bag is also provided at their seating posi-
tion to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in
the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
SAFETY 161
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for
vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the latch
plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat
belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury
in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal inju-
ries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you prop-
erly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
WARNING!
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to
hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if
you have questions regarding the seat belt or
retractor conditions, take your vehicle to an autho-
rized FCA dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision
Care Program facility for inspection.
WARNING!
6
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 SAFETY
(Continued)
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grab and twist the seat belt webbing
180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately
above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the top
of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward
to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that serves you
best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped
with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder
belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position
without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify
the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on
the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
SAFETY 163
Second Row Center Seat Belt Operating
Instructions — Fixed Rear Seat
(If Equipped)
The second row center seat belt may feature a seat belt
with a mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows the seat
belt to detach from the lower anchor when the seat is
folded. The mini-latch plate and regular latch plate can
then be stored out of the way in the left side trim panel for
added convenience to open up utilization of the storage
areas behind the front seats when the seat is not
occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate
from its stowed position in the left rear side trim
panel.
Mini-Latch Stowage
2. Grab the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over
the seat.
Shoulder Belt Routed Through The Seat Belt Guide Loop
3. Route the shoulder belt through the seat belt guide
loop on the top of the seatback near the inboard side
of the left head restraint.
Inserting Mini-Latch Plate Into Mini-Buckle
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a
“click.”
Mini-Latch Plate Buckled
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to
go around your lap.
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjustments when
the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING!
6
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 SAFETY
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the
lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the seat belt in a collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the
mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular latch plate
into the center red slot on the mini-buckle. The seat
belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If
necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch
plate and regular latch plate into its stowed position.
Detaching Mini-Latch And Mini-Buckle
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only
if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat
Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it
must be removed.
WARNING!
If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not prop-
erly connected when the seat belt is used by an occu-
pant, the seat belt will not be able to provide proper
restraint and will increase the risk of injury in a colli-
sion.
When reattaching the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the
preceding procedure to detach the mini-latch plate
and mini-buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach
the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
When the center seat belt is in use, make sure that
any cargo in the cargo compartment is properly
secured and does not contact the seat belt webbing,
and that there is no slack in the center shoulder belt
webbing.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when
worn, the distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occu-
pant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a colli-
sion. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap
belt is not long enough and only use in the recom-
mended seating positions. Remove and store the
Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
SAFETY 165
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if
they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder
belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place
the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack
from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices
may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt
placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed
air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt
system has a retractor assembly that is designed to
release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. See
Ú page 183 for additional information. The figure below
illustrates the locking feature for each seating position.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (Sliding Seat)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (Fixed Seat)
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
6
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 SAFETY
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the
buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly
restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may
be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an
authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with the electrical Air Bag System
Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
following Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic parts
of the air bag system whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If
the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC
position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will
not inflate.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
SAFETY 167
(Continued)
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power
or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the ON/
RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning
Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any
part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light,
either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial
startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related
gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags
may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument
panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on
until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 68.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering
wheel. The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air
bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
1 — Driver Front Air Bag
2 — Passenger Front Air Bag
3 — Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag/Driver Knee
Impact Bolster
4 — Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag/Passenger
Knee Impact Bolster
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to
reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
6
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 SAFETY
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger
Occupant Classification System (“OCS”) that is designed
to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output
appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as
determined by the OCS.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags
are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side,
or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce
substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects a
collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to
inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold
out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The
front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink
your eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some colli-
sions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your
seat belts even though you have air bags.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
SAFETY 169
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of a
Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle. It is
designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
output appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight, as
determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the
following:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is
located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM
uses input from the Sensor to determine the front
passenger’s most probable classification. The OCM
communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC may
reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag deployment based on occupant classification. In
order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly
wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the inflation
rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS
estimates that:
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects on it; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a small
passenger, including a child; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
child restraint; or
The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, allowing
a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment.
Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat and
never install a child restraint system, including a rear-facing
child restraint, in the front passenger seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on the
front passenger seat and where that weight is located. The
OCS communicates the classification status to the ORC.
The ORC uses the classification to determine whether the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should be
adjusted.
Front Passenger Seat
Occupant Status
Front Passenger Air Bag
Output
Rear-facing child restraint
Reduced-power
deployment
Child, including a child in a
forward-facing child
restraint or booster seat*
Reduced-power
deployment OR Full-power
deployment
Properly seated adult
Full-power deployment OR
reduced-power
deployment
Unoccupied seat
Reduced-power
deployment
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
6
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 SAFETY
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly
wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passengers are:
Sitting upright
Facing forward
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort-
ably on or near the floor
Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
seatback in an upright position
Seated Properly
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult,
occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce
the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s seated
weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so
may result in serious injury or death. The OCS determines
the most probable classification of the occupant that it
detects. The OCS will detect the front passenger’s
decreased or increased seated weight, which may result in
an adjusted inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not mean that the
OCS is working improperly. Decreasing the front
passenger’s seated weight on the front passenger seat
may result in a reduced-power deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing the front
passenger’s seated weight on the front passenger seat
may result in a full-power deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instrument
panel).
The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns
to face the rear of the vehicle.
The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright
position.
The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
and center console.
Accessories that may change the seated weight on the
front passenger seat are attached to the front
passenger seat.
Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
SAFETY 171
(Continued)
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel will
turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the front
passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS may
affect the operation of the air bag system. If the Air Bag
Warning Light does not come on, or stays on after you
start the vehicle, or it comes on as you drive, take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer for service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS
components that may affect the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly
classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the
OCS components must function as designed. Do not make
any modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat,
trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason, take
the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only FCA US LLC
approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the specific
model being repaired. Always use the correct seat
cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
WARNING!
If a child restraint system, child, small teenager or
adult in the front passenger seat is seated improp-
erly, the occupant may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different from the occupant’s properly
seated weight input. This may result in serious injury
or death in a collision.
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with the
seatback in an upright position, your back against
the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the
center of the seat, with your feet comfortably on or
near the floor.
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.
Holding an object may provide an output signal to the
OCS that is different than the occupant’s properly
seated weight input, which may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or death
in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor
under the front passenger seat.
WARNING!
6
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 SAFETY
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an after-
market seat cover or cushion.
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) component or SRS related component or
fastener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by FCA US LLC.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front
occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger
Knee Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column and a Supplemental Passenger Knee Air
Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the glove
compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working
together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and front air
bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs
are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or
on the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are
at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related compo-
nents, seat cover or cushion may inadvertently
change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal
collision. This could result in death or serious injury
to the front passenger if the vehicle is involved in a
collision. A modified vehicle may not comply with
required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (CMVSS).
If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
SAFETY 173
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering the
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows.
An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain side impact events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags
in a particular impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid
the ORC in determining the appropriate response to
impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side
Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side
impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left
side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a
right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled
or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows
where the SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or
killed. Occupants, including children, should never
lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from
the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat
belts properly and sit upright with their backs against
the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a
child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
the size of the child.
6
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 SAFETY
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but
they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are designed to
activate in certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether deployment in a
particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is
not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and
seat belt pretensioners should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not
deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system
determines if a rollover event may be in progress and
whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the
vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event, and
deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will
deploy the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on
both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions.
This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag
system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact
with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally
heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed signifi-
cantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering,
see your doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irrita-
tion, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not
be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air
Bags.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
SAFETY 175
(Continued)
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the
following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if equipped).
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the inter-
vention of the Enhanced Accident Response System.
Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these
other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident
Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC Blower
Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to the
STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from the
ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment
and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting the engine.
If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle elec-
trical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the
system by following the procedure described below. If you
have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system
and starting the engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after
performing the reset procedure, the vehicle must be
towed to an authorized dealer to be inspected and to have
the Enhanced Accident Response System reset.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint
Controller System serviced as well.
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do
not modify the components or wiring, including
adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering
wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of
the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
6
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 SAFETY
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the acceler-
ator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR
under normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally identi-
fying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://www.nhtsa.gov/
parents-and-caregivers or call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
en/services/road/child-car-seat-safety.html
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your trim cover
and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accesso-
ries may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air
bag system for persons with disabilities, contact an
authorized dealer.
WARNING!
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
SAFETY 177
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often
have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by
children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still
less than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their
rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing
in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who are over two years old or who have outgrown
the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing
convertible child seat. Children should remain in a
forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the
vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the
seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat.
The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the
vehicle by the seat belt.
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who have
not reached the height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint,
facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness,
facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child
restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat
belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
6
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 SAFETY
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat while the child is still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no”, then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or
remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower Anchors +
Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
SAFETY 179
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle
anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats.
There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position.
These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped
child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no
lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt
must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the
child restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Sliding Second Row LATCH Positions
Fixed Second Row LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using
the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint?
65 lb (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and
the child restraint is 65 lb (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor
instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lb
(29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach
a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowed by the
booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual for more
information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH
lower anchorages from the outboard seating positions?
Yes – Fixed 2nd
Row Only
N/A – Sliding 2nd
Row Seat
Fixed 2nd Row Seating: You can install child restraints with flexible lower
anchors in the center position. The inner anchorages are 18 inches (460 mm)
apart. Do not install child restraints with rigid lower anchors in the center
position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH
anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the
center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the
seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using
the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat? Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s
manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The head restraints can be removed in every seating position if they interfere
with the installation of the child restraint
Ú page 32.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
SAFETY 181
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
Sliding 2nd Row Seat:
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages — Sliding 2nd Row Seat
Fixed 2nd Row Seat:
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage
symbols on the seatback. They are just visible
when you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages — Fixed 2nd Row Seat
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat.
Tether Anchorage Locations
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped
with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will
have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage
and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage.
Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The
tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is
attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Sliding 2nd Row Seat:
This vehicle has 5 lower LATCH anchorages in the rear
seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the right outboard
position behind the front passenger (1). Anchorages D and
E are used for the left outboard position behind the driver
(3). Anchorages C and D are used for the center seating
position (2). Do not
install a LATCH-compatible child
restraint using anchorages B and C. This is not a
LATCH–compatible position in your vehicle.
You can install up to two child seats using the LATCH
system at the same time. If you can fit three child
restraints in your vehicle, you must use the seat belt to
install the center child restraint and you must use the
LATCH anchors for position (3) behind the driver. You can
use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for
installing the third child seat in position (1) behind the
front passenger.
6
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 SAFETY
Sliding Second Row Seat Lower Anchors
Options for installing two child seats using the LATCH
anchorages in this vehicle:
1. Right and left outboard seating positions (1 and 3):
Install the child seats in the right and left outboard
seating positions using lower anchorages A and B,
and D and E. Do not use the center seat anchorage,
C. If the child seats do not block the center seat belt
webbing and buckle, the center seat belt can be
used to restraint an occupant or child restraint in the
center seating position.
2. Right outboard and center seating positions (1 and
2): Install the first child seat in the right outboard
seating position using lower anchorages A and B.
Install the second child seat using the center
anchorages, C and D. Do not use the outer anchorage
closest to the opposite door, E. Do not use the
remaining left outboard seating position (3) for any
occupant. The center child restraint will block the
seat belt buckle for this position.
Fixed 2nd Row Seat:
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attachments
in the center seating position. Only install this type of child
restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child restraints
with flexible, webbing mounted lower attachments can be
installed in any rear seating position.
Fixed Second Row Seat LATCH Positions
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
WARNING!
Use anchorages C and D to install a LATCH-compat-
ible child restraint in the center seating position (2).
Do not
install a LATCH-compatible child restraint
using anchorages B and C. This is not a
LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.
A child restraint installed in the center position (2)
will block the seat belt buckle for the empty left
outboard seat behind the driver (3). Do not use this
seat for another occupant.
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint.
If you are installing three child restraints next to each
other, you must use the seat belt and the center
tether anchor for the center position. You must use
the LATCH anchors to install the child seat in position
(3), behind the driver. You may use either the LATCH
anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for installing the
child seat in position (1), behind the front passenger.
For typical installation instructions, see
Ú page 183.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. If you are installing
LATCH-compatible child restraints next to each other,
you must use the seat belt for the center position. You
can then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s
seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard
positions. For typical installation instructions, see
Ú page 183.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
SAFETY 183
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See
Ú page 183 to
check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages
for that seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or raise the
head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the
rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may
also move the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to
the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 185 for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used
by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle
the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the
child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind
the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child
restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat
belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts
are not toys and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/
shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing
out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract
back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the
retractor. See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
Ú page 165 for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table and the following sections for more
information.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH
anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
6
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations (Sliding Seat)
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations (Fixed Seat)
ALR — Switchable Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
ALR — Switchable Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using
the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward-facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a
forward-facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child
restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat? Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed, if
the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The head restraints can be removed in every seating position if they interfere
with the installation of the child restraint
Ú page 32.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of
the child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
SAFETY 185
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. If the second row seat can be reclined, you
may recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can
be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part
of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means
the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the
tether strap. See
Ú page 185 for directions to attach
a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether
anchorage. If the seat can be moved, you may need
to move the seat forward to provide better access to
the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move the child
restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See
Ú page 179 for
the location of approved tether anchorages in your
vehicle.
6
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 SAFETY
(Continued)
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where
possible, route the tether strap under the head
restraint and between the two posts. If not possible,
lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap
around the outboard side of the head restraint.
Tether Anchorage Locations
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
belts.
CONNECTED VEHICLES
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Data Collection
& Privacy” in your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual or
“Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity”
Ú page 75.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible
outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are breached. It may
be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle
control could occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
SAFETY 187
(Continued)
(Continued)
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding seat belt or retractor conditions, take
your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA
Certified Collision Care Program facility for inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first placed in the ON/RUN
position. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. After the bulb check, this light will illuminate with
a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has
been detected. It will stay on until the fault is removed. If
the light comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately.
See
Ú page 159 for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel
the air directed against the windshield. See an authorized
dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only use
a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat
that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so
it cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install
your floor mat upside down or turn your floor
mat over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is
secured using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before installing
any other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an
additional floor mat on top of an existing floor
mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under acceler-
ator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss
of vehicle control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
WARNING!
6
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 SAFETY
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the lug nut/bolt torque for tightness. Check the
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal
and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check the area under the vehicle after overnight parking
for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have an authorized dealer inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all
side windows fully open.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
189
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located in the
lower center area of the instrument panel.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
When the button is activated, all directional turn signals
will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an
emergency. Push the button a second time to turn off the
Hazard Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it only when your
vehicle is disabled or signaling a safety hazard warning for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers may
wear down your battery.
SOS AND ASSIST MIRROR
SOS And Assist Mirror
If equipped, the Rearview Mirror contains a SOS and a
ASSIST button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber
Ú page 262.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) 4G
(data) network, which comes as a built in function.
Services will only be operable if your SiriusXM
Guardian™ service is active and you are connected to
an operable LTE (voice/data) 4G (data) network.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there will be
a 10 second delay before the SOS Call system initiates a
call to a SOS operator, during which the LED will blink
green. To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS
call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the cancel-
1 — SOS Button
2 — ASSIST Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
7
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
lation button on the Device Screen. Termination of the
SOS Call will turn off the green LED light on the Rearview
Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the SOS and ASSIST
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a SOS operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS
operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to a SOS
operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call.
The vehicle brand.
The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional help is needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
SOS Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS
operator may be able to open a voice connection
with the vehicle to determine if additional help is
needed. Once the SOS operator opens a voice
connection with the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the
operator should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in
the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system will
attempt to remain connected with the SOS oper-
ator until the SOS operator terminates the connec-
tion.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with
important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico
DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not
answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
The Rearview Mirror light located between the SOS and
ASSIST buttons will continuously illuminate red.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
location), do not wait for voice contact from an Emer-
gency Services Agent. All occupants should exit the
vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper-
able network and GPS antennas. You could prevent
operable network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable network and GPS signal reception is
required for the SOS Call system to function properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to
initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that
can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio,
CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s elec-
trical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle.
IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY
REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to help protect you.
WARNING!
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 191
The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device
requires service. Please contact an authorized dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS
Call system operation. These include, but are not limited
to, the following factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash
LTE (voice/data) 4G (data) network and/or Global Posi-
tioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
LTE (voice/data) 4G (data) network congestion
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can
immediately connect you with help in the event that your
vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to your provided
radio supplement for complete information.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to
any one of the following support centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be
connected to someone who can help. Roadside Assis-
tance will know what vehicle you’re driving and its loca-
tion. Additional fees may apply for roadside assistance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle
support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for Radio,
Phone and NAV issues.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview Mirror
light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service the SOS Call system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If
the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint
Control system immediately.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating
the jack or changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slip-
pery areas.
7
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or
slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P) (automatic
transmission) or REVERSE (manual transmission).
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if
changing the driver’s front tire, chock the
passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked Example
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being lifted or raised.
JACK LOCATION/SPARE TIRE STOWAGE
The jack, tools, wheel chocks and spare tire are stowed
under the load floor behind the rear seat
Ú page 244.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the load floor handle, then lift access cover to
locate jack and tools.
Load Floor Handle
3. Remove the hook from the stowed position on the
back side of the load floor and place the hook over
the top body flange and weather seal. This will hold
the load floor up while obtaining the jack and spare
tire.
4. Remove the fastener securing the jack and spare tire.
Removing Jack And Spare Tire Fastener
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 193
(Continued)
5. Remove the chocks.
6. Remove the scissor jack and wheel bolt wrench from
the spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw
to the left to loosen the wheel bolt wrench, and
remove the wrench from the jack assembly.
Jack And Tool Assembly
NOTE:
The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack with two
attachment points. When the jack is partially expanded,
the tension between the two attachment points holds the
jack handle in place.
7. Remove the spare tire.
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
Jack Warning Label
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, wheel chocks, and
wheel bolt wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench
to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the
vehicle.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced immediately.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful
of motor traffic.
To ensure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
WARNING!
7
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench
to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the
wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counter-
clockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
NOTE:
Placement for the front and rear jacking locations are
critical. See the following images for proper jacking loca-
tions.
Jacking Locations
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest
to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill
flange, centering the jack saddle inside the cutout in
the sill cladding.
Front Lifting Point
NOTE:
The jack must be placed straight on with handle facing
outwards. Keep the jack and tools aligned while raising
the vehicle.
Front Jacking Location
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 195
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
7. Remove the alignment pin from the jack assembly
and thread the pin into the wheel hub to assist in
mounting the spare tire.
Installing Alignment Pin
8. Mount the spare tire.
Mounting Spare Tire
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped, do not attempt to install a center
cap or wheel cover on the compact spare
Ú page 245.
9. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the
wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel
bolts.
Installing Wheel Bolts
10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
11. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern
until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. If in
doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by an authorized
dealer or at a service station
Ú page 253.
12. After 25 miles (40 km), check the wheel bolt torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts
are properly seated against the wheel.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered to the ground. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
7
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
13. Securely stow the jack, tools, chocks, and flat tire.
Reinstalling Jack and Tire Fastener
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread
can be sealed with a Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g.,
screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire
Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to
approximately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to
drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
TIRE SERVICE KIT STORAGE
The Tire Service Kit is stowed under the load floor behind
the rear seat.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.
Load Floor Handle
TIRE SERVICE KIT COMPONENTS AND
O
PERATION
Tire Service Kit Components
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced immediately.
1 — Sealant Bottle
2 — Deflation Button
3 — Power Button
4 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
5 — Pressure Gauge
6 — Mode Select Knob
7 — Power Plug (located on the bottom side of the Tire
Service Kit)
8 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 197
(Continued)
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to this
position for air pump operation only. Use the
Black Air Pump Hose when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to this
position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant
and to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose
(clear hose) when selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button once to
turn on the Tire Service Kit. Push and release
the Power Button again to turn Off the Tire
Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes overinflated.
TIRE SERVICE KIT USAGE PRECAUTIONS
Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle and Sealant
Hose prior to the expiration date (printed at the upper
left hand corner on the bottle label) to assure optimum
operation of the system
Ú page 200.
Tire Service Kit Sealant Expiration Date Location
The Sealant Bottle and Sealant Hose are a one tire
application use and need to be replaced after each
use. Always replace these components immediately at
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and prop-
erly discarded.
For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the
Tire Service Kit.
You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Pump Hose and make sure the Mode Select Knob is in
the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid
injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit Sealant
is only intended to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch
(6 mm) diameter in the tread of your tire.
Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle
closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service
Kit.
Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under
the following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
If the wheel has any damage.
If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat
source.
7
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SEALING A TIRE WITH TIRE SERVICE KIT
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service
Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning Flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the
ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses and
to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit
flat on the ground. This will provide the best
positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into
the deflated tire and running the air pump. Move the
vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this
position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (P) (auto
transmission) or in Gear (manual transmission) and
place the ignition in the OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to
the deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose onto the
valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) from
the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into
The Deflated Tire:
Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.
NOTE:
Manual transmission vehicles must have the parking
brake engaged and the gear selector in NEUTRAL.
After pushing the Power Button, the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle through the
Sealant Hose and into the tire.
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within
0 – 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose:
1. Push the Power Button to turn Off the Tire Service
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose from the valve
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
Reconnect the Sealant Hose to the valve stem.
Check that the Mode Select Knob is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
Button to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug to a different 12 Volt power
outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available.
Make sure the engine is running before turning ON
the Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to previous use.
Call for assistance.
NOTE:
If the Mode Select Knob is on Air Mode and the pump is
operating, air will dispense from the Air Pump Hose only,
not the Sealant Hose.
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit
to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire
Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of
water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change
clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact
with clothing.
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physi-
cian immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately
with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
WARNING!
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 199
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant
Hose:
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
longer flowing through the hose (typically takes
30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant flows through the
Sealant Hose, the Pressure Gauge can read as high
as 70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge will
decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi
(4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when the
Sealant Bottle is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire
immediately after the Sealant Bottle is empty.
Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to
the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label on
the driver-side latch pillar (recommended pressure).
Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure
Gauge.
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
NOTE:
Never operate the compressor for longer than 20 minutes.
Risk of Overheating.
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle and place the sticker on the
instrument panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the
vehicle storage location.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location Ú page 198.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to the Air
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (black in color) and screw
the fitting at the end of hose onto the valve stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the
vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the
tire and loading information label on the driver-side
door opening.
CAUTION!
The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get hot
after use, so it should be handled carefully.
Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the Sealant Hose can result in sealant contacting
your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can
also result in sealant contacting internal Tire Service
Kit components which may cause permanent
damage to the kit.
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have
the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until
the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
7
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation Button
to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation
pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from
12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at
the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
panel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle and Sealant Hose
assembly at an authorized dealer as soon as possible
Ú page 200.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized
dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (clear in color).
2. Locate the red colored round Sealant Bottle release
button at the lower right hand corner of the kit.
3. Push and hold the Sealant Bottle release button, then
pull out the bottle holding the button.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle in the housing so that
the Sealant Hose aligns with the hose slot in the front
of the housing. Push and hold the Sealant Bottle
release button, then push the bottle into the housing
by holding the button. An audible click will be heard
indicating the bottle is locked into place. Release the
button.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose and return the hose to its storage
area (located on top of the housing).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in
the vehicle.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly,
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the
manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
Positive (+) Battery Post
See the following steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK (P) and turn the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cable’s reach, apply the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than
12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 201
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper cable to
the positive
(+)
post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive
(+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative
(-) end of the jumper cable to
the negative
(-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground. A “ground” is an
exposed metallic/unpainted part of the engine, frame
or chassis, such as an accessory bracket or large bolt.
The ground must be away from the battery and the
fuel injection system.
Jump Starting Label
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle for a few minutes, and
then start the engine in the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the disconnecting
procedure.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative
(-) post of the booster
battery.
3. Disconnect the positive
(+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive
(+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+)
jumper cable from the positive
(+) post of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above 2,000 RPM
since it provides no charging benefit, wastes fuel, and
can damage booster vehicle engine.
7
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle,
you should have the battery and charging system
inspected at an authorized dealer.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel for a
Cap-Less Fuel System, which can be found under the load
floor in the rear cargo area. If refueling is necessary, while
using an approved gas can, insert the refueling funnel into
the filler neck opening. Take care to open both flappers
with the funnel to avoid spills.
Fuel Funnel Location
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door
from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel door
to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel door. Do
not pry on the door.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A funnel is
provided to allow emergency refueling with a gas can.
See the following steps for refueling:
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel
nozzle.
Inserting Funnel
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper doors
open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
putting back in the spare tire storage area.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use
(i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery
will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the
fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in
violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to
turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 203
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be serviced by
an authorized dealer.
Potential signs of vehicle overheating:
Temperature gauge is at HOT (H)
Strong smell of coolant
White smoke coming from engine or exhaust
Coolant bottle coolant has bubbles present
In the event it is observed that the temperature gauge is
moving towards or close to the HOT (H) position, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking the
appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the engine idle speed
while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supple-
ment to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK (P) position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully separate
the shifter bezel and boot assembly from the center
console, and raise it up to access the gear selector
mechanism.
Shifter Bezel/Boot
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into
the gear selector override access hole (at the right
front corner of the gear selector assembly), and push
and hold the override release lever down.
Override Access Hole
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over
and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H” and
you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
7
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL (N) position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL (N).
8. Reinstall the gear selector boot.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Push and hold the lock button on the gear
selector. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and
REVERSE (R), while gently pressing the accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL (N) for
more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal
to engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
Push the ESC OFF button (if necessary), to place the Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial Off” mode,
before rocking the vehicle
Ú page 145. Once the vehicle
has been freed, push the ESC OFF button again to restore
“ESC On” mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for
at least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the
risk of clutch or transmission failure during
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis-
sion shifting occurring).
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 205
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled 4x4 vehicles may also be towed
Ú page 120.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to fascia/
bumper or associated brackets. State and local laws
regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
NOTE:
You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadver-
tent Electric Park Brake (EPB) engagement. The Auto
Park Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the
customer programmable features in the Uconnect
Settings.
Vehicles with a discharged battery or total electrical
failure when the EPB is engaged, will need a wheel
dolly or jack to raise the rear wheels off the ground
when moving the vehicle onto a flatbed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode, not the ACC mode.
NOTE:
The Safehold feature will engage the EPB whenever the
driver's door is opened (if the ignition is ON, transmission
is not in PARK, and brake pedal is released). If you are
towing this vehicle with the ignition in the ON/RUN mode,
you must manually disable the EPB each time the driver's
door is opened, by pressing the brake pedal and then
releasing the EPB.
If the ignition key is unavailable, or the vehicle's battery is
discharged, for instructions on shifting the transmission
out of PARK (P) for towing
Ú page 203.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground FWD MODELS
4X4 MODELS
1–SPEED POWER TRANSFER UNIT 2–SPEED POWER TRANSFER UNIT
Flat Tow NONE
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Detailed instructions
Ú page 120
Transmission in PARK
Power Transfer Unit in
NEUTRAL
Tow in
forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Rear
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Front OK
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
Ensure that the EPB is released, and remains
released, while being towed.
7
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) MODELS
The FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with all
four wheels
OFF of the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must be
towed with the front wheels
OFF of the ground (using a
towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels
raised).
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake (EPB) is released, and
remains released, while being towed. The EPB does not
need to be released, if all four wheels are
OFF the ground.
4X4 MODELS WITH 1–SPEED POWER
T
RANSFER UNIT
The FCA US LLC requires towing with all four wheels
OFF
the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed, or
with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on a
towing dolly.
4X4 MODELS WITH 2–SPEED POWER
T
RANSFER UNIT
The FCA US LLC recommends towing with all four wheels
OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or
with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end on
a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available and the Power
Transfer Unit is operable, vehicles
with a 2–speed Power
Transfer Unit may be towed (in the forward direction, with
ALL wheels on the ground), under the following conditions:
The Power Transfer Unit must be in NEUTRAL (N).
The transmission must be in PARK (P).
Ensure that the EPB is released, and remains released,
while being towed
Ú page 120.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be two
mounted in the front fascia/bumper and one in the rear
fascia/bumper. The rear tow hook will be located on the
driver's side of the vehicle.
Front Tow Hooks
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the previously
mentioned requirements can cause severe
transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is
not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the
ground. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the
remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal
damage to the transmission or power transfer unit
will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the previously
mentioned requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or power transfer unit damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the
remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal
damage to the transmission or power transfer unit
will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the previously
mentioned requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or power transfer unit damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 207
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use both of the
front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the
vehicle.
Rear Tow Hook
RECOVERY STRAP — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be included with a recovery strap.
Recovery straps do not act like traditional tow straps,
chains, or winch cables.
Using Recovery Strap
1. Review all warnings and instructions first.
2. Position the recovery vehicle.
3. Connect the recovery strap.
4. Add a recovery damper or blanket.
5. Clear the danger zone.
6. Safely and slowly start pulling.
7. Disconnect the recovery strap after both vehicles are
secure and parked.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
This feature is a communication network that takes effect
in the event of an impact. Detailed information can be
found on
Ú page 175.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed under certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle. Detailed information can be found on
Ú page 176.
WARNING!
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains
may break, causing serious injury or death.
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks.
Tow straps may become disengaged, causing
serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for tow
truck hookup or highway towing. You could damage your
vehicle.
WARNING!
Recovery straps should only be used in emergencies to
rescue stranded vehicles. Only use Recovery straps on
vehicles that fit within the recommended Gross Vehicle
Weight (GVW) of your recovery strap. Only attach
recovery straps to OE recommended anchor points or
emergency towing anchor points. Never attach to tow
ball or vehicle tie down point, these are not designed
for this purpose. Never attach to vehicle steering, drive
train, or any other suspension components. NEVER pull
a strap over sharp edges or abrasive surfaces that can
damage the recovery strap. NEVER use a damaged
strap, it has reduced strength. DO NOT attempt to
repair straps. ONLY persons involved in the recovery
should be in either vehicle. No passengers. Anyone
inside the vehicles can be struck by strap recoil,
causing serious injury. MOVE bystanders at least 40 ft
(12.2 m) from the recovery area when using the
recovery strap.
7
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, or extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures will influence when the “Oil Change
Required” message is displayed. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
an authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under Instrument Cluster
Display
Ú page 64.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
At Every Fuel Stop:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns
on.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and
brake master cylinder; fill as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 209
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the following required maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
8
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, boot seals. tie rod ends, and
replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler pulley, and
replace if necessary.
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Clean and lube sun roof tracks. X X X X X X X
Replace the cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Replace spark plugs — 2.0L Engine.
1
X X
Replace spark plugs — 2.4L Engine.
1
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 211
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.
8
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.0L ENGINE
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Engine Oil Dipstick
2 — Oil Fill Cap 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 7 — Battery
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 213
2.4L ENGINE
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Engine Oil Dipstick
2 — Oil Fill Cap 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 7 — Battery
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
8
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of
the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN
and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
NOTE:
Use care when filling under hood fluids such as Engine Oil,
Windshield Washer Solvent, Antifreeze etc. to minimize
spillage onto top of engine. Any excess fluid that is spilled
onto the top of the engine should be removed using
compressed air or absorbent cloth.
Adding 1 qt (1 L) of oil when the reading is at the low end
of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the high end
of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The windshield and rear window washers share the same
fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is located in the front of
the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level
in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean
the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
NOTE:
Use care when filling under hood fluids such as Engine Oil,
Windshield Washer Solvent, Antifreeze etc. to minimize
spillage onto top of engine. Any excess fluid that is spilled
onto the top of the engine should be removed using
compressed air or absorbent cloth.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, and periodic
maintenance is not required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents are
flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must
be exercised when filling or working around the washer
solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn
or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large
amounts of water
Ú page 200.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a
booster battery or any other booster source with an
output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 215
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure
washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may
void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
Ú page 256.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified by the
API. The manufacturer only recommends API trademark
oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies 0W-20,
0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40 and
5W-40 engine oil.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils, only
use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the correct
API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
numbers should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the
addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes)
to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the posi-
tive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts and
connections however, the pressures generated by these
machines is such that complete protection against
water ingress cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the
knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
8
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used for
replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified filters
should be used. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter is
unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/
USCAR-36 Filter Performance Requirements.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
Refer to the Maintenance Plan in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 209.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality Mopar® certified filters should be used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Loosen the screws from the engine air cleaner filter
cover.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access the
engine air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the housing
assembly.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
1 — Screws
1— Engine Air Cleaner Filter
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 217
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing assembly if significant dirt
or debris is present before replacing the engine air cleaner
filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the housing
assembly with the engine air cleaner filter
inspection surface facing downward.
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto the
housing assembly locating tabs.
3. Install screws to secure the engine air cleaner filter
cover to the housing assembly.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt
body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
Belt slips
Groove jumping (belt does not maintain correct posi-
tion on pulley)
Belt broken (identify and correct problem before new
belt is installed)
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component
such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
inspected for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools; we recommend having your vehicle serviced
at an authorized dealer.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the engine air cleaner filter cover lid
screws or damage may result.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with the vehicle running.
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located in your owner’s
information kit, for further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury
or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
8
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a — If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydrofluo-
rocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly substance. It is
recommended that air conditioning service be performed
by an authorized dealer or other service facilities using
recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-1234yf — If Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with
a low global-warming potential. It is recommended that air
conditioning service be performed by an authorized dealer
using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter
The cabin air filter is located in front of the evaporator on
the lower right of center console. Perform the following
procedure to replace the filter:
1. Remove the passenger side console closeout cover.
2. Pull the console closeout cover rearward to
disengage the front retaining tab and remove the
cover.
Console Closeout Panel
3. Pull down the passenger hush panel under the dash
panel.
Hush Panel
4. Remove the filter door by pushing down the tab on
the top of the door to release the cover then rotate
the door out and lift up.
Air Filter Cover Location
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air
conditioning components. Such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. With the cabin air filter removed and the
blower operating, the blower can contact hands and
may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 219
5. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing. Take note of the air filter position
indicators.
Cabin Air Filter
6. Install the cabin air filter with the air filter position
indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
7. Install the passenger side hush panel under the dash
panel and console closeout cover.
Refer to the Maintenance Plan in this chapter for the
proper maintenance intervals Ú page 209.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such
as Mopar® Spray White Lube to ensure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating,
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release
mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and
lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar® Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on
geographical area and frequency of use. If chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots are present, clean the
wiper blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the
following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate
airflow direction through the filter. Failure to properly
install the filter will result in the need to replace it more
often.
8
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip
up the release tab on the wiper blade and while
holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper
blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm
with one hand and separating the wiper blade from
the wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper
blade toward the right side of the vehicle to separate
the wiper blade from the wiper arm).
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm
is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of
the wiper arm with the wiper release tab open and the
blade side of the wiper facing up and away from the
windshield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the
opening in the wiper blade under the release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper
arm and rotate the wiper blade until it is flush against
the wiper arm. Fold down the latch release tab and
snap it into its locked position. Latch engagement will
be accompanied by an audible click.
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may
be damaged.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 221
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass
to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the glass
unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first.
Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without
unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the
vehicle.
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, grab
the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest to wiper
arm with one hand. With your left hand hold the wiper
arm as you pull the wiper blade away from the wiper
arm past its stop far enough to unsnap the wiper
blade pivot pin from the receptacle on the end of the
wiper arm.
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an audible snap.
4. Still grabbing the bottom end of the wiper blade,
move the wiper blade upward and away from the
wiper arm to disengage.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass
to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the glass
unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first.
Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without
unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the
vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
4 — Wiper Arm
8
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
(Continued)
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on
the end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of the
wiper arm with one hand, and apply pressure on the
wiper blade flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into
place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the
wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have
the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is
raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can
result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is
in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO see
Ú page 186.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle
in areas where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
WARNING!
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 223
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the front of the
A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc.
If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT
PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032).
Refer to the Maintenance Plan in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 209.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to Engine Fluids And Lubricants for further
information Ú page 256.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant,
may result in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. OAT engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Tech-
nology (HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is introduced
into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling
system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled
with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors
or anti-rust products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radi-
ator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of
propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not recom-
mended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact an
authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle is built with engine coolant (OAT coolant
conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended
maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze)
can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing
this extended maintenance period, it is important to use
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using OAT
engine coolant that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032. When adding
engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use
higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if tempera-
tures below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please
contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.
The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount
of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The
fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF
position. The fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON position.
WARNING!
8
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
Use care when filling under hood fluids such as Engine
Oil, Windshield Washer Solvent, Antifreeze etc. to mini-
mize spillage onto top of engine. Any excess fluid that
is spilled onto the top of the engine should be removed
using compressed air or absorbent cloth.
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact a
local authorized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recommended and
can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT
coolant are mixed in an emergency, have an authorized
dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant will
return to the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/
recovery tank (if equipped).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with
your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for
your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in
open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground, clean up any ground spills immediately. If
ingested, seek emergency assistance immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine off and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant freeze point or
replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As
long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant only needs to be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
MS.90032 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not
overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilometers
of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front
of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of
moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating
on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat
opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter
the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant needs
to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are required, the
cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a minimum
of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and
distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your
engine which contains aluminum components.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 225
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine cooling performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the Maintenance Plan for the proper
maintenance intervals
Ú page 209.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the brake master cylinder should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately
if the Brake System Warning Light is on. If necessary, add
fluid to bring level within the designated marks on the side
of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to
clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
cap. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked
when pads are replaced. If the brake fluid is abnormally
low, check the system for leaks. For further information
Ú page 256.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
It is strongly recommended against using any special
additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmission
Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance
may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do
not add any fluid additives to the transmission. Avoid
using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect
seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required; therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to
have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the
vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly
a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the
brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking capacity
in an emergency.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid.
For further information
Ú page 256. Using the wrong
type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake
system and/or impair its performance. The proper
type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified
on the original factory installed hydraulic master
cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause
it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the
chemicals can damage your transmission components.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
8
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer's specified transmission fluid
Ú page 256. It is important to maintain the transmission
fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission;
only the approved lubricant should be used.
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive
current.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result in
vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may
occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. For fluid specifications
Ú page 256.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. The use of a fuse with a
rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous
electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse
continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit
that must be corrected. Never replace a blown fuse
with metal wires or any other material. Do not place
a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa.
Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious
personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
If it is necessary to wash the engine compartment, take
care not to directly hit the fuse box, and the windshield
wiper motor with water.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse With A Good/Functional Fuse Element
3 — Blade Fuse With A Bad / Not Functional Fuse
Element (Blown Fuse)
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 227
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, mini-fuses and relays. A label that identifies each component
is printed on the inside of the cover.
Power Distribution Location
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power
distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
8
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – 70 Amp Gray Electric Power Str
F02 – 150 Amp Gray Aux PDC *
F03 – 300 Amp Gray Alternator
F04 – – Battery
F05 – 100 Amp Gray Rad Fan
F06 – – Not Used
F07 15 Amp Blue – Powertrain Control Mod (PCM) * / Surge Solenoid Purge Valve *
F08 25 Amp Clear – Fuel Injectors / ECM / PCM/
F09
10 Amp Red
–
UREA Coolant Pump/PCM *
15 Amp Blue Coolant Pump *
F10 20 Amp Yellow – Power Transfer Unit (PTU) 4WD *
F11 – – Not Used
F12 10 Amp Red – Purging Pump *
F13 10 Amp Red – Voltage Stability Mod (VSM)/Powertrain Control Mod (PCM)/Engine Control Module (ECM)
F14 10 Amp Red –
Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM)*/Power Take-Off Unit (PTU)*/Electric Park Brake (EPB) /
RDM*/ Brake System Module (BSM) / Brake Pedal Switch / Back Up Lamp Switch *
F15 – – Not Used
F16 20 Amp Yellow – Ign Coils / Additional Diesel Content
F17 30 Amp Pink – Brake Vacuum Pump *
F18 – – Not Used
F19 – 40 Amp Green Starter
F20 10 Amp Red – A/C Clutch
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 229
F21 – – Not Used
F22 5 Amp Tan – Radiator Fan (PWM) Enable
F23 50 Amp Red – Voltage Stability Module (VSM) #2
F24 20 Amp Yellow – Rear Wiper
F25B 20 Amp Yellow – FT/RR Washer
F26 – 30 Amp Pink Fuel Heater *
F27 – – Not Used
F28 15 Amp Blue – Transmission Control Module (TCM/Shifter)
F29 – – Not Used
F30 10 Amp Red – Engine Control Module (ECM) / EPS / PCM / Gas Particulate Filter (GPF)
F31 – – Not Used
F32 – – Not Used
F33 – – Not Used
F34 – – Not Used
F35 – – Not Used
F36 – – Not Used
F37 – – Not Used
F38 – 60 Amp Yellow Glow Plug *
F39 – 40 Amp Green HVAC Blower Motor
F40 – 20 Amp Blue Trailer Tow Park Light *
F41 – 50 Amp Red Voltage Stability Module (VSM) #1
F42 – 30 Amp Pink Trailer Tow Module *
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F43 20 Amp Yellow – Fuel Pump Motor
F44 – 30 Amp Pink Trailer Tow Receptacle *
F45 – 30 Amp Pink Passenger Door Module (PDM) *
F46 – 25 Amp Clear Sunroof Control Module *
F47 – – Not Used
F48 – 30 Amp Pink Driver Door Module *
F49 – 30 Amp Pink Power Inverter (115 Volt/220 Volt A/C) *
F50 – 30 Amp Pink Power Liftgate Module *
F51 – – Not Used
F52 – 30 Amp Pink Front Wipers
F53 – 30 Amp Pink Brake System Module (BSM) - ECU And Valves
F54 – 30 Amp Pink Body Control Module (BCM) Feed 3
F55 10 Amp Red – Blind Spot Sensors*/Rearview Camera*/ Rear Heated Seat Switch *
F56 15 Amp Blue – Ignition Node Module (IGNM) / KIN / RF Hub / Electric Steering Column Lock (ESCL) /USB Port
F57 20 Amp Yellow – Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lights *
F58 10 Amp Red – Occupant Classification Module/VSM/ESCL/TT Mod
F59 – 30 Amp Pink Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) *
F60 20 Amp Yellow – Power Outlet – Center Console
F61 20 Amp Yellow – Trailer Tow Right Stop/Turn Lights *
F62 20 Amp Yellow – Windshield De-Icer *
F63 20 Amp Yellow – Front Heated/Ventilated Seats *
F64 20 Amp Yellow – Rear Heated Seats *
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
* If Equipped
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 231
F65 10 Amp Red –
In Vehicle Temperature Sensor*/Humidity Sensor*/Driver Assist System Module (DASM)*/
Park Assist (PAM) *
F66 15 Amp Blue – HVAC (ECC)/Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/Gateway Module
F67 – – Not Used
F68 – – Not Used
F69 10 Amp Red – Transfer Case Switch (TSBM)/Active Grill Shutter (AGS) *
F70 5 Amp Tan – Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
F71 – – Not Used
F72 10 Amp Red – Heated Mirrors * / PM Sensor *
F73 – 20 Amp Blue NOX Sensors*/ Trailer Tow Backup *
F74 – 30 Amp Pink Rear Defroster (EBL)
F75 20 Amp Yellow – Cigar Lighter *
F76 20 Amp Yellow – Rear Differential Module (RDM) 4WD *
F77 10 Amp Red – Hands Free Release */ Brake Pedal Switch *
F78 10 Amp Red – DTV / TBM / OBD Port
F79 10 Amp Red –
Integrated Center Stack (ICS) / HVAC /Electric Park Brake (EPB) SW Steering Control Mod
(SCCM) /Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)
F80 20 Amp Yellow – Radio
F81 – – Not Used
F82 5 Amp Tan – Gateway Module
F83 –
20 Amp Blue Engine Controller Module (ECM)*
30 Amp Pink SCU Module *
F84 – 30 Amp Pink Electric Park Brake (EPB) – Left
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
* 30 Amp mini fuse is substituted for 25 Amp Circuit Breaker.
F85 15 Amp Blue – (CSWM) Heated Steering Wheel *
F86 20 Amp Yellow – Horn
F87 – – Not Used
F88 10 Amp Red – Seat Belt Reminder (SBR)*/Smart Camera *
F89 10 Amp Red – Auto/Manual Headlight Leveling*
F90 – – Not Used
F91 20 Amp Yellow – Power Outlet (Rear Seats Customer Selectable) *
F92 – – Not Used
F93 – 40 Amp Green Brake System Module (BSM) – Pump Motor
F94 – 30 Amp Pink Electric Park Brake (EPB) – Right
F95 10 Amp Red –
Sunroof Module */ Rain Sensor Module (LRSM) */ ECMM /Passenger Window SW/ Power
Outlet Console/ Illumination / DTV
F96 10 Amp Red – Airbag
F97 10 Amp Red – Airbag
F98 25 Amp Clear – Audio Amplifier / ANC *
F99 – – Not Used
F100 – – Not Used
Circuit Breakers
CB1 25 Amp Power Seat (Driver)
CB2 25 Amp Power Seat (Pass)
CB3 25 Amp Power Window
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
* If Equipped
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 233
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located on the Body Control Module (BCM) in the passenger compartment on the left side dash panel under the instrument panel.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers.
NOTE:
See an Authorized Dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Cavity Blade Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F32 10 Amp Red Interior Lighting
F36 10 Amp Red Intrusion Module/Siren *
F37 7.5 Amp Brown UCI Port (USB & AUX)
F38 20 Amp Yellow Deadbolt All Unlock
F42 7.5 Amp Brown Passenger Lumbar Support
F43 20 Amp Yellow Washer Pump Front
F48 25 Amp Clear Fog Lamp Rear Left/Right *
F49 7.5 Amp Brown Lumbar Support
F50 7.5 Amp Brown Wireless Charging Pad *
F51 7.5 Amp Brown Driver Window Switch/Power Mirrors *
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Cargo Lamp TL212–2
8
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
BACK-UP LAMP
See below steps to replace:
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver at the top
of the bulb access cover to pry the lower trim panel
from the liftgate.
3. Once the access panel is loose, pull it back exposing
the insulation.
4. Move insulation towards center of vehicle to expose
the back of liftgate lamp.
5. Twist the socket counterclockwise and remove from
lamp.
6. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
7. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket.
8. Move insulation back to original position.
9. Close the liftgate.
Overhead Console Lamp PLW214–2A
Reading Lamp WL212–2
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam Headlamps LED
Front Park/Daytime Running Lamps LED
Front Turn Signal Lamps LED
Front Fog Lamps LED
Rear Tail/Stop Lamps LED
Rear Turn Signal Lamps LED
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED
Back-Up Lamps W21W
License Plate Lamp LED
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 235
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding
the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact
spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the
sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera-
ture Grades
8
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 237
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located
on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will
find it on the inboard side of the tire.
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd
week of 1981 or 1991
8
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side
door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of psi (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The
maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original
equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 239
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire And Loading Information
Placard
Ú page 113.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles must
not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing
Ú page 113.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs” on the Tire And Loading Information Placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
8
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) =
295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and
towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the
seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity
for your vehicle. Never overload them.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 241
(Continued)
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability of
the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response
or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judg-
ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look
properly inflated even when they are underinflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in
overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock.
Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
8
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or
conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation.
Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it is not
designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run Flat tire is
changed after being driven under a Run Flat mode 14 psi
(96 kPa) condition, please replace the TPMS sensor as it
is not designed to be reused.
NOTE:
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle on
a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
mode.
See the Tire Pressure Monitoring System section for more
information
Ú page 155.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial
ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other
types of tires.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not
spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are
stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 243
(Continued)
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced
Ú page 243.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle sched-
uled maintenance is highly recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The
manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires
equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed
Ú page 243. Refer to the
Tire And Loading Information Placard or the Vehicle
Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The
Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on
the original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety
Information for more information relating to the Load
Index and Speed Symbol of a tire
Ú page 236.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
1 — Tread Wear Indicators
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You
could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels
may change suspension dimensions and perfor-
mance characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This
can cause unpredictable handling and stress to
steering and suspension components. You could
lose control and have a collision resulting in serious
injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with
load ratings approved for your vehicle.
8
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different All Season tires. All Season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use All Season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on
ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when
ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information,
contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in
size and type to the original equipment tires.
Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be
operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked
before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a
spare tire, please refer to Tire Service Kit Ú page 196.
Refer to Towing Requirements - Tires for restrictions when
towing with a spare tire designated for temporary
emergency use
Ú page 118.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 245
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
And Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The Full Size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use Full Size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original
equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle
and remember to always wash when the surfaces are not
hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc.,
and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to wipe
away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush.
They can damage the wheel’s protective coating that helps
keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar® Wheel Treatment or
Mopar® Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended, or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic
cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your
Tire And Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side
door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at
the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle.
Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
8
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove
the water droplets from the brake components. This
activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and
prevent vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow
traction devices are recommended. Follow these
recommendations to guard against damage.
Snow traction device must be of proper size for the tire,
as recommended by the snow traction device manu-
facturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use with the
snow traction device.
Please see the following table for the recommended
tire size, axle and snow traction device:
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only
car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels,
DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing
compounds. They will permanently damage this finish
and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP
AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
FWD
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (Maximum
Projection Beyond Tire Profile Or
Equivalent)
Sport
Latitude
Latitude Plus
Latitude LUX
Limited
Overland
Front 215/60R17 7 mm Cable Chain
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 247
4X4 - Jeep® Active Drive I
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (Maximum
Projection Beyond Tire Profile Or
Equivalent)
Sport
Latitude
Latitude Plus
Latitude LUX
Trailhawk
Limited
Overland
Front 215/60R17 9mm Cable Chain
4X4 - Jeep® Active Drive II
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (Maximum
Projection Beyond Tire Profile Or
Equivalent)
Latitude
Latitude Plus
Latitude LUX
Limited
Overland
Front
225/65R17
225/60R18
7mm Cable Chain
Trailhawk 225/65R17 9mm Cable Chain
8
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to
maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and
contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the Maintenance Plan for the proper
maintenance intervals
Ú page 209. The reasons for any
rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation
being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does
not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross)
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Use on front tires only.
Damage to Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models may
result if tire chains or traction devices are used with
original equipment size tires.
Damage to Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) Models without
a Two-Speed Power Transfer Unit may result if tire
chains or traction devices are used with original
equipment size tires.
Damage to Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) Trailhawk
Models may result if tire chains or traction devices
are used with original equipment size tires.
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clearance
between tires and other suspension components, it
is important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). Auto-
sock traction devices do not require retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to
the power transfer unit. Tire rotation schedule should
be followed to balance tire wear.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 249
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
8
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three weeks,
we recommend that you take the following steps to
minimize the drain on your vehicle's battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started
again.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make
roads passable in snow and ice and those that are
sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons
are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is
operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme
conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim,
and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone
breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or a mild car
wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Use precautions to not scratch the
paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 251
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace the belts
if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work
properly.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. If
your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding seat belt or retractor conditions,
take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility
for inspection.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products may not
be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
8
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar®
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show any
foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more so than
darker colors. The leather is designed for easy cleaning,
and the manufacturer recommends Mopar® Total Clean
leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather
seats as needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Do not use alcohol and alcohol-based and/or
ketone-based cleaning products to clean leather
upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may result.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
253
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument
panel. The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle
through the windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal
capability, the remaining system will still function.
However, there will be some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel
during application, greater pedal force required to slow or
stop, and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle,
the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a six-sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts
and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
100 ft-lb
(135 N·m)
M12 x 1.25 19 mm
9
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/
bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is
fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it halfway).
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly tightened.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is
not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see a dealer
immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than
recommended octane number can cause engine failure
and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before
considering service for the vehicle.
2.0L ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all emission
requirements, and provide satisfactory fuel
economy and performance, when using
unleaded regular gasoline having an octane
rating of 87, as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use
of 91 or higher octane premium gasoline will allow these
engines to operate to optimal performance. This increase
in performance is most noticeable in hot weather or under
heavy load conditions, such as while towing.
2.4L ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all emission
regulations and provide optimum fuel economy
and performance when using unleaded regular
gasoline having a posted octane number of 87
as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher
octane premium gasoline is not required, as it will not
provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner-burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated
gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates
and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions
and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide
improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result
in personal injury.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 255
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on Compressed
Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system
components. Problems that result from running CNG or LP
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
M
ANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) IN
G
ASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasolines to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life
and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump;
therefore, you should ask the gasoline retailer whether the
gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and
California reformulated gasoline.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to further
aide in minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and
diaphragm materials.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control system
can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of meth-
anol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
tives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
9
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines 15.8 gal 60 L
Engine Oil With Filter
2.0L Engine 5 qt 4.7 L
2.4L Engine 5.5 qt 5.2 L
Cooling System*
2.0L Engine 9 qt 8.6 L
2.4L Engine 7.2 qt 6.8 L
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of the
manufacturer Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 2.0L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® API SP/GF-6A Certified SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Engine
Oil which meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-13340.
Equivalent full synthetic 5W-30 API SP engine oil can be used but must have the API
Donut trademark
Ú page 215.
CAUTION!
Failure to use the recommended API SP/GF-6A or equivalent oil can cause engine
damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 257
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395. Equivalent full synthetic
SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the API Starburst trademark
Ú page 215.
Fuel Selection – 2.0L & 2.4L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
9
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's
service history. This can often provide a clue to the current
problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
(additional charges may apply). If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for
an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. FCA US LLC’s authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason you are
still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of
the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need
assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact FCA US LLC Customer
Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer center
should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (mobile, home and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Available 24 hours, 7 days a week.
Call 1-800-521-2779 or visit chrysler.rsahelp.com(USA)
Call 1-800-363-4869 or visit fca.roadsideaid.com
(Canada)
Who is Covered
You are covered by Roadside Assistance services if you
are a purchaser for use of the vehicle. Roadside
Assistance services last for five years or 60,000 miles on
the odometer, whichever occurs first, calculated from the
start date of the Basic Limited Warranty, as set forth in the
Warranty Information book.
1
1. Towing services provided through Cross Country Motor Club, Inc.
Medford, MA 02155, except in AK,CA, HI, OR, WI, and WY, where
services are provided by Cross Country Motor Club of California, Inc.,
Thousand Oaks, CA 91360.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 259
What to Do
If your vehicle requires jump start assistance, out of gas/
fuel delivery, tire service, lockout service or towing as a
result of a mechanical breakdown, dial toll-free: USA:
1-800-521-2779/Canada: 1-800-363-4869. Provide your
name, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) required for
covered services, license plate number, and your location,
including the telephone number from which you are calling.
Briefly describe the nature of the problem and answer a few
simple questions. You will be given the name of the service
provider and an estimated time of arrival. If you feel you are
in an unsafe situation, please let us know. With your
consent, we will contact local police or safety authorities.
If Unable to Contact Roadside Assistance
If you are unable to contact Roadside Assistance or unable
to provide a valid Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), and
you obtain towing services on your own, you may submit
your original receipts from the licensed towing or service
facility, for services rendered within30 days of the
occurrence. Be sure to include your VIN, odometer mileage
at the time of service, and current mailing address. We will
process the claim based on vehicle and service eligibility. If
eligible, we will reimburse you for the reasonable amount
actually paid, based on the usual and customary charges
for that service in the area where they were provided. FCA
US LLC’s determination relating to reimbursement is final.
Correspondence should be mailed to:
FCA US LLC Customer Assistance
P.O. Box 9145
Medford, MA 02155
Attention Claims Department
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time.
The Roadside Assistance program is subject to restrictions
and conditions of use, which are determined solely by FCA
US LLC.
Flat Tire Service
If you are inconvenienced by a flat tire, we will dispatch a
service provider to use your vehicle’s temporary spare tire
(if equipped) as recommended in your Owner’s Manual.
This is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Out of Gas/Fuel Delivery
Drivers cannot always count on a gas station being
nearby, especially when traveling away from home. We will
dispatch a service provider to deliver a small amount of
fuel (maximum two gallons) to get you to a nearby station.
This service is limited to two occurrences in a 12-month
period.
Battery Jump Assistance
No time is a good time for a depleted battery. With
Roadside Assistance, you do not have to worry about
being stranded. We will dispatch a service provider to
provide you with a battery jump anytime, day or night.
Lockout Service
Whether the keys are locked in your vehicle or frozen locks
are keeping you from getting on your way, help is just a
phone call away. This service is limited to providing access
to the vehicle’s seating area. It does not cover the cost of
replacement keys.
Towing Service
Our towing service gives you peace of mind and
confidence. If your vehicle becomes disabled as a result of
a mechanical breakdown, Roadside Assistance will
dispatch a towing service to transport your vehicle to the
closest authorized Chrysler, Dodge, Jeep®, or Ram dealer.
If you choose to go to another dealer, you will be
responsible for the cost if the extra distance exceeds
10 miles.
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D.F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
10
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, FCA US
LLC has installed special TDD (Telecommunication
Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by
dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and
for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The Mopar® Vehicle Protection plans are the
ONLY vehicle extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide additional
protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you
purchased a Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service contract, call
FCA US LLC's Service Contract National Customer Hotline
at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract you
may have purchased from another manufacturer. If you
require service after the FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to ensure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions
of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and
market. Refer to www.mopar.com/om for further
information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions
of FCA Canada Inc. warranties applicable to this vehicle
and market. Refer to www.owners.mopar.ca/en for further
information.
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories and
factory filled fluids are available from an authorized
dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle to keep it
operating at its best and maintain its original condition.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle
components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects, or other reproductive harm.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 261
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/
or components and is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make it
easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled
vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven
diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and
equipment.
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific FCA vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or www.owners.mopar.ca
(Canada).
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through Archway at:
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
10
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS
*If you have purchased this vehicle used or have changed
your address, please provide the following information
and mail to:
FCA US LLC
P.O. Box 21–8008
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Make sure to include the following:
Date of Sale (mm/dd/yy)
Vehicle Indentification Number (17 Character ID
located on top left of the instrument panel)
Exact Odometer Reading
First and Last Name
Phone Number
Street Address, City, State and Zip Code
Email Address
*Applies to US residents only.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes
dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
263
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes ....................................................... 253
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control)......90
, 92
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............................ 223
Adding Fuel................................................................... 113
Additives, Fuel .............................................................. 255
Air Bag........................................................................... 167
Air Bag Operation.................................................... 168
Air Bag Warning Light .................................... 166
, 169
Driver Knee Air Bag ................................................ 172
Enhanced Accident Response ...................... 175
, 207
Event Data Recorder (EDR).................................... 207
Front Air Bag .................................................. 167
, 169
If Deployment Occurs ............................................. 174
Knee Impact Bolsters............................................. 172
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .......................... 175
Maintenance........................................................... 175
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ......................... 167
Transporting Pets.................................................... 186
Air Bag Light .................................................68
, 166, 187
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)........... 216
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...................................... 217
Air Conditioner Refrigerant................................. 217
, 218
Air Conditioner System ................................................ 217
Air Conditioning Filter ........................................... 48
, 218
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips.....................................48
Air Filter......................................................................... 216
Air Pressure
Tires ......................................................................... 241
Alarm
Arm The System.........................................................20
Disarm The System ................................................... 20
Security Alarm..................................................... 20
, 70
All Wheel Drive (AWD).....................................................85
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ............................... 223
, 256
Disposal ...................................................................224
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .....................................143
Anti-Lock Warning Light.................................................. 70
Assist, Hill Start.............................................................148
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................................126
Auto Down Power Windows............................................53
Auto Up Power Windows ................................................ 53
Automatic Climate Controls ........................................... 45
Automatic Dimming Mirror.............................................34
Automatic Door Locks .............................................23
, 24
Automatic Headlights .....................................................40
Automatic High Beams................................................... 40
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .......................... 48
Automatic Transaxle.......................................................81
Automatic Transmission................................................. 81
Adding Fluid .............................................................226
Fluid And Filter Change...........................................226
Fluid Change............................................................226
Fluid Level Check ....................................................225
Fluid Type.................................................................226
Special Additives .....................................................225
Torque Converter.......................................................85
Autostick.......................................................................... 84
AUX Cord..........................................................................50
Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .................................................. 51
B
Battery....................................................................69, 214
Keyless Key Fob Replacement................................. 14
Battery Saver Feature .................................................... 42
Belts, Seat..................................................................... 187
Blind Spot Monitoring ..................................................150
Body Mechanism Lubrication...................................... 219
Bodywork ...................................................................... 250
B-Pillar Location ........................................................... 238
Brake Assist System............................................144
, 154
Brake Control System .................................................. 143
Brake Fluid.................................................................... 225
Brake System ......................................................225
, 253
Anti-Lock (ABS)........................................................ 253
Fluid Check.............................................................. 225
Master Cylinder .......................................................225
Parking....................................................................... 78
Warning Light ............................................................ 68
Brake/Transmission Interlock....................................... 81
Brightness, Interior Lights.............................................. 42
Bulb Replacement........................................................233
Bulbs, Light...................................................................188
C
Camera, Rear................................................................112
Capacities, Fluid........................................................... 256
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) .....................................................212
, 213
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)................................... 224
Car Washes................................................................... 250
Carbon Monoxide Warning .......................................... 188
11
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264
Care And Maintenance ................................................ 250
Cargo Area Cover ............................................................59
Cargo Compartment .......................................................59
Cargo Load Floor.............................................................59
Cargo Tie-Downs .............................................................59
Cellular Phone .............................................................. 140
Center Seat Storage Compartment ...............................50
Certification Label........................................................ 113
Changing A Flat Tire ..................................................... 191
Chart, Tire Sizing .......................................................... 236
Chassis Fluids And Lubricants .................................... 257
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light).........75
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ............................... 186
Checks, Safety.............................................................. 186
Child Restraint.............................................................. 176
Child Restraints
Booster Seats.......................................................... 178
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt................. 183
Infant And Child Restraints.................................... 177
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children.............. 179
Older Children And Child Restraints...................... 177
Seating Positions.................................................... 178
Clean Air Gasoline........................................................ 254
Cleaning
Wheels..................................................................... 245
Climate Control ...............................................................45
Cold Weather Operation .................................................77
Compact Spare Tire ..................................................... 245
Console
Storage .......................................................................50
Contract, Service.......................................................... 260
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ......................... 224
Cooling System............................................................. 222
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ................................... 223
Coolant Level .......................................................... 224
Cooling Capacity......................................................256
Disposal Of Used Coolant .......................................224
Drain, Flush, And Refill............................................223
Inspection ...................................................... 223
, 224
Points To Remember...............................................224
Pressure Cap ...........................................................224
Radiator Cap............................................................224
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...........................223
Corrosion Protection.....................................................250
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ......................................90
Cruise Light ..............................................................74
, 75
Customer Assistance....................................................258
Cybersecurity ................................................................126
D
Daytime Running Lights .................................................40
Defroster, Windshield...................................................187
De-Icer, Remote Start..................................................... 19
Diagnostic System, Onboard.......................................... 75
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine)...............................................................214
Disable Vehicle Towing.................................................205
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ....................................224
Door Ajar.......................................................................... 69
Door Ajar Light ................................................................69
Door Locks
Automatic............................................................ 23
, 24
Doors ............................................................................... 20
Driver Memory Settings.................................................. 26
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ....................................................28
Driving ...........................................................................123
E
Easy Entry Seats............................................................. 31
Electric Brake Control System..................................... 143
Anti-Lock Brake System.......................................... 143
Electronic Roll Mitigation...............................144
, 150
Electric Parking Brake.................................................... 78
Electrical Power Outlets................................................. 51
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ................................ 145
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light..................... 69
Emergency
SOS Emergency Call................................................189
Emergency Gas Can Refueling .................................... 202
Emergency, In Case Of
Gear Selector Override ........................................... 203
Hazard Warning Flasher .........................................189
Jacking..................................................................... 191
Jump Starting .......................................................... 200
Tow Hooks ...............................................................206
Emission Control System Maintenance........................ 75
Engine ..................................................................212
, 213
Air Cleaner ...............................................................216
Break-In Recommendations..................................... 78
Checking Oil Level................................................... 214
Cooling ..................................................................... 222
Exhaust Gas Caution...............................................188
Fails To Start ............................................................. 78
Flooded, Starting....................................................... 78
Fuel Requirements..................................................254
Jump Starting .......................................................... 200
Oil ............................................................................. 215
Oil Filler Cap ...................................................212
, 213
Oil Filter.................................................................... 216
Oil Reset .................................................................... 64
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
265
Oil Selection ............................................................ 215
Oil Synthetic ............................................................ 215
Overheating............................................................. 203
Engine Fluids And Lubricants...................................... 256
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............. 175
, 207
Ethanol.......................................................................... 254
Exhaust Gas Cautions.................................................. 188
Exhaust System............................................................ 222
Exterior Lights........................................................ 39
, 188
F
Filters
Air Cleaner............................................................... 216
Air Conditioning................................................ 48
, 218
Engine Oil ................................................................ 216
Engine Oil Disposal................................................. 215
Flashers
Hazard Warning ...................................................... 189
Turn Signals ..................................................... 74
, 188
Flash-To-Pass ..................................................................40
Flat Tire Changing ...............................................235
, 244
Flat Tire Stowage ................................................ 235
, 244
Flooded Engine Starting .................................................78
Fluid Capacities............................................................ 256
Fluid Leaks ................................................................... 188
Fluid Level Checks
Brake ....................................................................... 225
Engine Oil ................................................................ 214
Fob, Key...........................................................................13
Fog Lights ........................................................................41
Fold-Flat Seats ................................................................28
Folding Rear Seats..........................................................29
Forward Collision Warning........................................... 154
Four Wheel Drive.............................................................85
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle................................................204
Fuel
Additives...................................................................255
Clean Air...................................................................254
Ethanol.....................................................................254
Light............................................................................ 71
Materials Added ......................................................255
Methanol..................................................................254
Tank Capacity ..........................................................256
Fueling...........................................................................113
Fuses .............................................................................226
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) ............................... 35
Gasoline, Clean Air .......................................................254
Gasoline, Reformulated ...............................................254
Gear Ranges ................................................................... 82
Gear Selector Override.................................................203
Glass Cleaning ..............................................................252
Gross Axle Weight Rating .............................................115
Gross Combination Weight Rating...............................115
Gross Trailer Weight .....................................................115
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating........................................114
GVWR.............................................................................113
H
Hazard Warning Flashers.............................................189
Head Restraint Removal ................................................ 32
Head Restraints ..............................................................32
Head Rests......................................................................32
Headlights .......................................................................39
Automatic................................................................... 40
Automatic High Beam ............................................... 40
Cleaning...................................................................250
High Beam.......................................................... 39
, 40
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ...................... 40
On With Wipers.......................................................... 41
Passing ............................................................... 39
, 40
Switch ........................................................................ 39
Time Delay................................................................. 41
Heated Mirrors ............................................................... 35
Heated Seats.................................................................. 31
Heated Steering Wheel .................................................. 24
Hill Descent Control ..................................................... 146
Hill Descent Control Indicator...................................... 146
Hill Start Assist .............................................................148
Hitches
Trailer Towing .......................................................... 116
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener)............................... 35
Hood Prop ....................................................................... 56
Hood Release ................................................................. 56
I
Ignition ............................................................................ 16
Switch ........................................................................ 16
Ignition Pak Interlock ..................................................... 81
Illuminated Entry ............................................................ 43
Indicator light
Blue............................................................................ 75
Green ......................................................................... 73
White.......................................................................... 74
Yellow......................................................................... 73
Inside Rearview Mirror .......................................... 34
, 189
Instrument Cluster
Descriptions
S
.......................................... 61, 63, 74
Display ....................................................................... 63
Display Controls ........................................................ 63
11
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266
Engine Oil Reset.........................................................64
Menu Items .........................................................64
, 67
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning................................. 251
Interior Appearance Care ............................................ 251
Interior Lights ..................................................................42
Inverter
Power..........................................................................52
J
Jack Location................................................................ 191
Jack Operation ............................................................. 191
Jacking And Tire Changing .......................................... 191
Jump Starting ............................................................... 200
K
Key Fob
Arm The System.........................................................20
Disarm The System....................................................20
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) .........14
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ............15
Keyless Enter 'n Go™......................................................22
Passive Entry..............................................................22
Keys .................................................................................13
Replacement..............................................................15
L
Lane Change Assist ........................................................42
LaneSense.................................................................... 109
Lap/Shoulder Belts...................................................... 160
Latches ......................................................................... 188
Hood ...........................................................................56
Leaks, Fluid .................................................................. 188
Life Of Tires .................................................................. 243
Liftgate ............................................................................ 57
Closing........................................................................ 58
Hands-Free ................................................................ 58
Opening......................................................................57
Light Bulbs ....................................................................188
Lights.............................................................................188
Air Bag..................................................... 68
, 166, 187
Automatic Headlights................................................ 40
Automatic High Beam ............................................... 40
Brake Assist Warning ..............................................146
Brake Warning........................................................... 68
Bulb Replacement...................................................233
Cruise .................................................................. 74
, 75
Daytime Running....................................................... 40
Engine Temperature Warning................................... 69
Exterior..............................................................39
, 188
Fog....................................................................... 41
, 74
High Beam ................................................... 39
, 40, 75
High Beam/Low Beam Select .................................. 40
Hill Descent Control Indicator.................................146
Illuminated Entry .......................................................43
Intensity Control ........................................................ 42
Interior........................................................................42
LaneSense.......................................................... 71
, 74
Lights On Reminder................................................... 41
Low Fuel..................................................................... 71
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine)...................... 71
Park ............................................................................ 74
Passing.......................................................................40
Seat Belt Reminder................................................... 68
Security Alarm............................................................ 70
Service .....................................................................233
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS).....................72
, 155
Traction Control .......................................................146
Turn Signals............................................... 42, 74, 188
Vanity Mirror .............................................................. 34
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode..................................... 67
Load Shed Battery Saver On ......................................... 67
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction........................... 67
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ........................... 67
Loading Vehicle ............................................................ 113
Tires .........................................................................238
Locks
Automatic Door .................................................. 23
, 24
Child Protection......................................................... 24
Power Door ................................................................ 21
Low Tire Pressure System............................................ 155
Lubrication, Body..........................................................219
Lug Nuts/Bolts ............................................................. 253
Luggage Carrier .............................................................. 60
M
Maintenance................................................................... 56
Maintenance Free Battery ........................................... 214
Maintenance Schedule................................................ 208
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) .......... 71
, 75
Manual
Service ..................................................................... 261
Media Hub ...................................................................... 50
Memory Feature (Memory Seats).................................. 26
Methanol....................................................................... 254
Mirrors............................................................................. 34
Heated ....................................................................... 35
Outside....................................................................... 34
Power ......................................................................... 35
Rearview ...........................................................34
, 189
Vanity ......................................................................... 34
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
267
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle..........................................................................8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System.................................... 155
Mopar Parts.................................................................. 260
MP3 Control ....................................................................50
Multi-Function Control Lever ..........................................39
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..........................................78
O
Occupant Restraints .................................................... 159
Off Road Pages ............................................................ 141
Accessory Gauges................................................... 142
Drivetrain................................................................. 141
Pitch And Roll.......................................................... 142
Status Bar ............................................................... 141
Off-Road Pages
Selec-Terrain ........................................................... 142
Oil Filter, Change.......................................................... 216
Oil Filter, Selection ....................................................... 216
Oil Life Reset — If Equipped
S
.....................................64
Oil Pressure Light ............................................................69
Oil Reset ..........................................................................64
Oil, Engine..................................................................... 215
Capacity................................................................... 256
Checking.................................................................. 214
Dipstick.................................................................... 214
Disposal................................................................... 215
Filter......................................................................... 216
Filter Disposal ......................................................... 215
Identification Logo.................................................. 215
Materials Added To................................................. 215
Pressure Warning Light.............................................69
Recommendation....................................................215
Synthetic ..................................................................215
Onboard Diagnostic System........................................... 75
Operating Precautions.................................................... 75
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual.......................................................261
Outside Rearview Mirrors............................................... 34
Overheating, Engine .....................................................203
P
Paddle Shifters ...............................................................84
Paint Care......................................................................250
Parking Brake ................................................................. 78
ParkSense
Front And Rear........................................................... 99
ParkSense Active Park Assist ......................................106
ParkSense System, Rear................................................ 99
Passive Entry................................................................... 22
Pets................................................................................186
Pinch Protection..............................................................56
Placard, Tire And Loading Information........................238
Power
Brakes ......................................................................253
Door Locks................................................................. 21
Inverter.......................................................................52
Mirrors........................................................................ 35
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet).............................51
Windows.....................................................................53
Power Seats
Down .......................................................................... 30
Forward ...................................................................... 30
Rearward.................................................................... 30
Up ...............................................................................30
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ................................165
Preparation For Jacking ...............................................191
Pressure Washing ........................................................215
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ................................................................165
R
Radial Ply Tires .............................................................242
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ......................... 224
Radio
Off-Road Pages .......................................................141
Radio Operation ........................................................... 140
Radio Remote Controls................................................140
Rain Sensitive Wiper System......................................... 44
Rear Camera.................................................................112
Rear Cross Path............................................................ 153
Rear ParkSense System ................................................ 99
Rear Seats, Folding ........................................................ 29
Rear Wiper/Washer ....................................................... 45
Recreational Towing..................................................... 120
Shifting Into Power Transfer Unit Neutral (N)........ 122
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) ................. 122
Shifting Out Of Power Transfer Unit Neutral (N) ... 123
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) ............. 123
Reformulated Gasoline ................................................254
Refrigerant....................................................................218
Release, Hood ................................................................ 56
Reminder, Lights On....................................................... 41
Reminder, Seat Belt .....................................................159
Remote Control
Starting System......................................................... 18
Remote Keyless Entry .................................................... 14
Arm The Alarm........................................................... 20
Disarm The Alarm ..................................................... 20
Programming Additional Key Fobs........................... 15
11
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control...................... 140
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode ............................................18
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features .........19
Uconnect Settings......................................................19
Remote Starting System.................................................18
Replacement Keys ..........................................................15
Replacement Tires ....................................................... 243
Reporting Safety Defects............................................. 261
Restraints, Child........................................................... 176
Restraints, Head .............................................................32
Roll Over Warning .............................................................8
Roof Type Carrier ............................................................60
Rotation, Tires .............................................................. 248
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ...................................... 187
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ................................... 188
Safety Defects, Reporting............................................ 261
Safety Information, Tire ............................................... 235
Safety Tips .................................................................... 186
Schedule, Maintenance............................................... 208
Seat Belt Reminder.........................................................68
Seat Belts ............................................................159
, 187
Adjustable Shoulder Belt........................................ 162
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ................. 162
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage.......... 162
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)........................ 165
Child Restraints ...................................................... 176
Energy Management Feature ................................ 165
Extender .................................................................. 164
Front Seat..............................................159
, 160, 161
Inspection................................................................ 187
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................................161
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................................162
Lap/Shoulder Belts .................................................160
Operating Instructions.............................................161
Pregnant Women.....................................................165
Pretensioners ..........................................................165
Rear Seat .................................................................160
Reminder .................................................................159
Seat Belt Extender...................................................164
Seat Belt Pretensioner............................................165
Untwisting Procedure..............................................162
Seat Belts Maintenance...............................................251
Seats................................................................................28
Adjustment.......................................................... 28
, 30
Easy Entry .................................................................. 31
Head Restraints......................................................... 32
Heated........................................................................ 31
Memory ...................................................................... 26
Rear Folding............................................................... 28
Tilting.......................................................................... 28
Vented........................................................................ 32
Ventilated................................................................... 32
Security Alarm.......................................................... 20
, 70
Arm The System.........................................................20
Disarm The System ................................................... 20
Selec-Terrain................................................................... 88
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ................................................ 16
Sentry Key Replacement................................................ 15
Service Assistance........................................................258
Service Contract ...........................................................260
Service Manuals ...........................................................261
Settings .........................................................................126
Shift Lever Override......................................................203
Shifting
Automatic Transmission........................................... 81
Power Transfer Unit, Shifting Into Power
Transfer Unit Neutral (N) ..........................122
, 123
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer Case
Neutral (N).......................................................... 122
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer Case
Neutral (N).......................................................... 123
Shoulder Belts .............................................................. 160
Side Distance Warning System ................................... 104
Side View Mirror Adjustment ......................................... 34
Signals, Turn.......................................................... 74
, 188
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)...........................................246
Snow Tires .................................................................... 244
Spare Tires...........................................................244
, 245
Speed Control
Cancel ........................................................................ 92
Resume...................................................................... 91
Starting............................................................................ 77
Button ........................................................................ 16
Cold Weather............................................................. 77
Engine Fails To Start................................................. 78
Remote ...................................................................... 18
Starting Procedures ....................................................... 77
Steering
Tilt Column................................................................. 24
Wheel, Heated.................................................... 24
, 25
Steering Wheel Audio Controls.................................... 140
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls..... 140
Stop/Start................................................................ 74
, 89
Storage..................................................................... 49
, 50
Console...................................................................... 50
Storage Compartment, Center Seat.............................. 50
Storage, Vehicle..................................................... 48
, 250
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
269
Storing Your Vehicle..................................................... 250
Stuck, Freeing .............................................................. 204
Sun Roof...................................................................54
, 56
Closing........................................................................54
Opening ......................................................................54
Sun Visor Extension ........................................................34
Sunshade Operation.......................................................54
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag ................. 167
Sway Control, Trailer .................................................... 150
Symbol Glossary................................................................ 9
Synthetic Engine Oil ..................................................... 215
System, Remote Starting................................................18
T
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC)..........................48
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo...................................................59
Time Delay
Headlight ....................................................................41
Tire And Loading Information Placard ........................ 238
Tire Markings................................................................ 235
Tire Safety Information ................................................ 235
Tire Service Kit ................................. 196
, 197, 199, 200
Tires .................................................. 188
, 241, 244, 249
Aging (Life Of Tires)................................................. 243
Air Pressure............................................................. 241
Chains...................................................................... 246
Changing ................................................................. 191
Compact Spare ....................................................... 245
General Information ...................................... 241
, 244
High Speed.............................................................. 242
Inflation Pressure ................................................... 241
Jacking..................................................................... 191
Life Of Tires ............................................................. 243
Load Capacity................................................. 238
, 239
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ..............72
, 155
Quality Grading ........................................................249
Radial .......................................................................242
Replacement ...........................................................243
Rotation....................................................................248
Safety ............................................................. 235
, 241
Sizes .........................................................................236
Snow Tires................................................................244
Spare Tires..................................................... 244
, 245
Spinning ...................................................................242
Trailer Towing ..........................................................118
Tread Wear Indicators.............................................243
Wheel Nut Torque....................................................253
To Open Hood ................................................................. 56
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ........................... 115
, 117
Torque Converter Clutch ................................................ 85
Tow Hooks
Emergency ...............................................................206
Towing ........................................................114
, 116, 205
Disabled Vehicle......................................................205
Recreational ............................................................120
Towing Behind A Motorhome.......................................120
Traction Control ............................................................150
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)............................................150
Trailer Towing................................................................114
Frontal Area .............................................................115
Hitches .....................................................................116
Minimum Requirements .........................................117
Tips...........................................................................119
Trailer And Tongue Weight............................ 116
, 117
Weight Carrying Hitch..............................................115
Weight Distributing Hitch ........................................115
Wiring .......................................................................118
Trailer Towing Guide.....................................................116
Trailer Weight................................................................116
Transaxle
Automatic .................................................................. 81
Operation................................................................... 81
Transmission .................................................................. 81
Automatic .........................................................81
, 225
Maintenance ...........................................................225
Transporting Pets .........................................................186
Tread Wear Indicators.................................................. 243
Turn Signals...................................................... 39
, 42, 74
U
Uconnect
Uconnect Settings............................................ 19
, 126
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features .................. 19
, 22
Passive Entry Programming ..................................... 22
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ........................................ 249
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) .............. 35
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) —
If Equipped
S
............................................................... 35
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt..................................162
USB.................................................................................. 50
V
Vanity Mirrors ................................................................. 34
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)............................ 253
Vehicle Loading ...................................................113
, 239
Vehicle Maintenance ...................................................215
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations....................................8
Vehicle Settings............................................................ 126
Vehicle Storage...................................................... 48
, 250
Voice Command ............................................................. 25
Voice Recognition System (VR) ..................................... 25
11
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270
W
Warning light
Red .............................................................................68
Yellow .........................................................................70
Warning Lights And Messages.......................................68
Warnings, Roll Over...........................................................8
Warranty Information................................................... 260
Washers, Windshield ................................................... 214
Washing Vehicle........................................................... 250
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .........................................245
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim..........................................245
Wind Buffeting ................................................................ 54
Window Fogging.............................................................. 48
Windows.......................................................................... 53
Power ......................................................................... 53
Windshield Defroster....................................................187
Windshield Washers....................................................... 43
Fluid..........................................................................214
Windshield Wiper Blades.............................................219
Windshield Wipers................................................. 43
, 214
Wipers Blade Replacement .........................................219
Wipers, Intermittent ....................................................... 43
Wipers, Rain Sensitive ................................................... 44
23_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident
and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention
o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver while the
vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is
moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states
or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for
common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (USA), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your
local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
1-877-426-5337 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or
purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal
minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
First Edition
23_KL_OM_EN_USC
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take
following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep
brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store
and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
owners.mopar.ca
CanadaUSA
mopar.com/om
©2022 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une
marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
